TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR: Georgia Highway Garage Town of Georgia, Vermont
WLA Project No: 2020022 February 19, 2021
525 Hercules Drive | Suite Two | Colchester Vermont Phone: 802.655.5020 | www.wiemannlamphere.com SECTION 00 0102 PROJECT INFORMATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Project Name: Georgia Highway Garage, located at: 83 Plains Road. Georgia , Vermont 05478. B. The Owner, hereinafter referred to as Owner: Town of Georgia 1. Sales Tax Exemption Number: 03-6000882. C. Owner's Project Representative: 1. _____ Ascent Consulting, LLC.. 2. Address: 270 Blackmer Blvd.. 3. City, State, Zip: Stockbridge, VT 05772. 4. Phone/Fax: 802.503.7008. 5. E-mail: [email protected].
1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. Summary Project Description: New construction of a 15000sf highway garage, and office building. .
1.03 PROJECT CONSULTANTS A. The Architect, hereinafter referred to as Architect: 1. Address: 525 Hercules Drive, Suite 2 2. City, State, Zip: Colchester, Vermont 05446 3. Phone/Fax: 802.655.5020
1.04 PROCUREMENT TIMETABLE A. The Owner reserves the right to change the schedule or terminate the entire procurement process at any time.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage PROJECT INFORMATION 00 0102 - 1 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage PROJECT INFORMATION 00 0102 - 2 February 19, 2021 SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
1.01 Division 00 -- Procurement and Contracting Requirements A. 00 0102 - Project Information B. 00 0110 - Table of Contents C. 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders
SPECIFICATIONS
2.01 Division 01 -- General Requirements A. 01 1000 - Summary B. 01 2300 - Alternates C. 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures D. 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements E. 01 4000 - Quality Requirements F. 01 4100 - Regulatory Requirements G. 01 4110 - Commercial Building Energy Standards H. 01 4533 - Code-Required Special Inspections I. 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls J. 01 6000 - Product Requirements K. 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions L. 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements M. 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal N. 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals O. 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training P. 01 8316 - Exterior Envelope Performance Requirements
2.02 Division 02 -- Existing Conditions Reference Arch, and MEP Drawing for Existing Condition Notations and Instructions.
2.03 Division 03 -- Concrete A. 03 0516 - Underslab Vapor Barrier - Stego Industries
2.04 Division 04 -- Masonry (NOT USED)
2.05 Division 05 -- Metals Reference Structural Drawings
2.06 Division 06 -- Wood, Plastics, and Composites A. 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry B. 06 8316 - Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling
2.07 Division 07 -- Thermal and Moisture Protection A. 07 0553 - Fire and Smoke Assembly Identification
Georgia Highway Garage TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 1 February 19, 2021 B. 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation C. 07 4113 - Metal Roof Panels D. 07 4213.19 - Insulated Metal Wall Panels E. 07 8400 - Firestopping F. 07 9200 - Joint Sealants
2.08 Division 08 -- Openings A. 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors C. 08 3513.13 - Accordion Folding Doors D. 08 3613 - Sectional Doors E. 08 5413 - Fiberglass Windows F. 08 7100 - Door Hardware G. 08 8000 - Glazing
2.09 Division 09 -- Finishes A. 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation B. 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies C. 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing D. 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings E. 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring F. 09 9113 - Exterior Painting G. 09 9123 - Interior Painting
2.10 Division 10 -- Specialties A. 10 1400 - Signage B. 10 2600 - Wall and Door Protection C. 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories D. 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties E. 10 5113 - Metal Lockers
2.11 Division 11 -- Equipment (NOT USED)
2.12 Division 12 -- Furnishings A. 12 3200 - Manufactured Wood Casework
2.13 Division 21 -- Fire Suppression A. 21 0000 - Fire Protection Performance Specification
2.14 Division 22 -- Plumbing A. 22 0000 - Plumbing
2.15 Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) A. 23 0000 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
Georgia Highway Garage TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 2 February 19, 2021 B. 23 0500 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods C. 23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment D. 23 0548 - Seismic Restraint for Mechanical Systems & Equipment E. 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC F. 23 0700 - Mechanical Insulation G. 23 2113 - Hydronic Pipe and Pipe Fittings H. 23 2116 - Piping Specialties I. 23 3000 - Air Distribution J. 23 5200 - Gas Fired Condensing Boiler
2.16 Division 26 -- Electrical A. 26 0500 - General Provisions B. 26 0519 - Wire and Cables C. 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems D. 26 0533 - Conduits and Boxes E. 26 2413 - Electrical Service, Panelboards and Circuit Breakers F. 26 2726 - Wiring Devices - Switches and Receptacles G. 26 2800 - Circuit and Motor Disconnects H. 26 5000 - Lighting
2.17 Division 27 -- Communications A. 27 1500 - Telecommunications and Data Systems
2.18 Division 28 -- Electronic Safety and Security A. 28 3000 - Fire Alarm System END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 3 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 4 February 19, 2021
Town of Georgia Highway Garage Instruction to Bidders & Bid Form 19-Feb-21
Schedule The anticipated schedule is outlined below. The owner reserves the right to modify the schedule as they deem necessary.
1. Post GC RFQ 12/09/20 2. GC RFQ Due 12/30/20 3pm EDT 3. Pre-qualified GC Firms Selected 01/06/21 4. Bid Package Released 02/19/21 5. Mandatory Prebid Meeting 02/24/21 10am 6. RFI Close 03/05/21 7. Bid Date 03/17/21 3pm EDT 8. Bid Award 03/23/21 9. Start Construction 04/01/21 Instructions to Bidders 1. The town will only accept bids from firms who have been pre-qualified as listed below. All bids will be due 3/12/21, 3pm via email in a pdf format to Matt Young [email protected] and Amber Baker [email protected]. Late bids will not be accepted. There will not be a public bid opening. The owner reserves the right to award the project in the best interest of the owner and based on best value. The owner also has the right to waive or correct any irregularities in their best interest.
Prequalified Bidders Firm Contact Phone & Email Breadloaf Michael McLaughlin 802-388-9871 | [email protected] Connor Contracting Michael Connor 802-527-1955 | [email protected] Engelberth Pierre Leblanc 802-846-2330 | [email protected] Farrington David Farrington 802-985-8669 | [email protected] Neagley & Chase Heidi Davis 802-658-6320 | [email protected] Peak CM Jeffrey Davis 802-343-3535 | [email protected]
2. There will be a mandatory pre-bid meeting at the current garage on 2/24/21 10am. Email name and contact of folks who will be attending from your firm by end of day 2/23/21. Subcontractors are not required to attend.
3. Bid Form-A is due on bid date. Bid Form-B is due within the next 24 hours and can be submitted electronically in a pdf format to Matt Young and Amber Baker.
4. All questions re: this project must be directed to John LaMothe [email protected], David Roy [email protected] and copy Matt Young and Amber Baker. Do not correspond with town employees or town board members regarding this bid, otherwise you may be disqualified. Bidder RFI’s are due no later than 3/5/21 noon via email. All RFI questions and answers will be shared to all bidders in a form of an addendum. This document and any addenda will become part of the final construction contract. Page 1 of 4 Town of Georgia Highway Garage ITB & Bid Form
5. The successful bidder will enter a contract with the Town of Georgia using the ConsensusDocs 205 Short Form Lump Sum Price.
6. The cost of preparation of this bid will be the sole responsibility of the bidder.
7. Plans and specifications will be available on the town website and at Blueprints Etc.
Insurance Requirements The following insurance certificates will be required within 5 days of Notice of Award or Notice to Proceed letter is issued. Owner will purchase and maintain builders risk insurance.
1. Certificate of insurance showing coverage for general liability, umbrella, property, auto, workers compensation. 2. 100% payment and performance bond. 3. Professional liability on behalf of pre-engineered steel building portion of the project.
Page 2 of 4 Town of Georgia Highway Garage ITB & Bid Form
Town of Georgia Highway Garage Bid Date 3/12/21 3pm Bid Form-A
Garage Lump Sum Bid: $______(includes all site work, core & shell, interior finishes, septic system, former garage, bond) Alternate Bids: 1. Pave over existing garage pavement, ADD: $______
Bidder has examined and acknowledged the following addenda, if applicable.
Addendum No. & Date:
______
______
By signing this bid, I attest that I am the duly authorized officer of the company and have the authority to commit company resources to complete the work at the price bid and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the bidding documents.
Bidder: ______Date: ______Address: ______Print Name: ______Title: ______
Signature: ______Email: ______
Page 3 of 4 Town of Georgia Highway Garage ITB & Bid Form
Town of Georgia Highway Garage Due Date 3/12/21 3pm Bid Form-B
Send this form with requested information via email to Matt Young [email protected] and copy Amber Baker [email protected] Garage Cost Breakdown Item Value Name(s) (primary subs only) General conditions
Site work, site concrete
Onsite mound & septic system
Landscape
Concrete foundation, interior/exterior slabs. Total cubic yards: Pre-engineered steel package
Steel erector
Metal sandwich panels
Panel installer
Interior finishes, FFE
Fire Protection, holding tank, pump
Plumbing
HVAC Electrical
Former garage work Total Construction Soft Cost & Fee P&P Bond Total Bid (needs to match Bid Form-A)
Include the following information with your Bid Form-B submission.
1. High level schedule, showing major scopes of work, start date, duration. Assume start date 01-Apr-19. 2. Identify pre-engineered steel manufacturers, shop drawing/engineering duration, fabrication & delivery duration.
Page 4 of 4 Town of Georgia Highway Garage ITB & Bid Form
SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Georgia Highway Garage B. Owner's Name: Town of Georgia. C. Architect's Name: Wiemann Lamphere Architects.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A. Owner will remove the following items before start of work: 1. Radio Tower Cabling. 2. ______. 3. ______. B. Contractor shall remove and store the following prior to start of work, for later reinstallation by Contractor:
1.03 WORK BY OWNER A. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by Owner after Substantial Completion. Some items include: 1. Furnishings. 2. Small equipment. B. Owner will supply and/or coordinate the following for installation by Contractor: 1. Air Compressor. 2. (2) Through roof truck exhaust collectors (From Existing Garage). 3. Macuraco Gas Detector (From Existing Garage). 4. Wall Mounted CO Detectors and inlet/outlets (From Existing Garage)
1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2 February 19, 2021 SECTION 01 2300 ALTERNATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Description of Alternates.
1.02 ACCEPTANCE OF Alternates A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF Alternates A. Alternate No. 1 - Paving for existing building drive-lane: B. Alternate No. 2 - Deduct Unit Heater from Wash Bay : C. Alternate No. 3 - Provide loadbearing bulk aggregate (Glavel) in lieu of R20 XPS under-slab insulation AND compacted structural fill. :
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage ALTERNATES 01 2300 - 1 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage ALTERNATES 01 2300 - 2 February 19, 2021 SECTION 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 2300 - Alternates, for product alternatives affecting this section. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, coordination.
1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes from Contract Documents requirements proposed by Contractor to materials, products, assemblies, and equipment. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Proposed due to changed Project circumstances beyond Contractor's control. a. Unavailability. b. Regulatory changes. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Proposed due to possibility of offering substantial advantage to the Project. a. Substitution requests offering advantages solely to the Contractor will not be considered.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CSI/CSC Form 1.5C - Substitution Request (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage); Current Edition. B. CSI/CSC Form 13.1A - Substitution Request (After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase); Current Edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. A Substitution Request for products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system. 2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Agrees to provide same or equivalent maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable. 4. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the work to be complete, with no additional cost to Owner. 5. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 6. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer.
Georgia Highway Garage SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 1 February 19, 2021 C. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request, and information necessary to provide an actionable response. 1. Forms indicated in the Project Manual are adequate for this purpose, and must be used. D. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item.
3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING PROCUREMENT A. Submittal Form (before award of contract): 1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 1.5C - Substitution Request (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage). See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable.
3.03 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Submittal Form (after award of contract): 1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 13.1A - Substitution Request. See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable. B. Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule. C. Submit request for Substitution for Convenience immediately upon discovery of its potential advantage to the project, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule. 1. In addition to meeting general documentation requirements, document how the requested substitution benefits the Owner through cost savings, time savings, greater energy conservation, or in other specific ways. 2. Document means of coordinating of substitution item with other portions of the work, including work by affected subcontractors. 3. Bear the costs engendered by proposed substitution of: a. Owner's compensation to the Architect for any required redesign, time spent processing and evaluating the request. D. Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances: 1. Without a separate written request.
3.04 RESOLUTION A. Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision. Provide this data in an expeditious manner. B. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 1. Architect's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the submitted form.
3.05 ACCEPTANCE A. Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and incorporated into work of the project by Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Architectural Supplementary Instructions, or similar instruments provided for in the Conditions of the Contract.
3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 2 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 3 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General administrative requirements. B. Electronic document submittal service. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Construction progress schedule. F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Number of copies of submittals. H. Requests for Interpretation (RFI) procedures. I. Submittal procedures.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: General product requirements. B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance data; warranties and bonds.
1.03 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements for coordination of execution of administrative tasks with timing of construction activities. B. Make the following types of submittals to Architect: 1. Requests for Interpretation (RFI). 2. Requests for substitution. 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4. Test and inspection reports. 5. Design data. 6. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 7. Applications for payment and change order requests. 8. Progress schedules. 9. Coordination drawings. 10. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. 11. Closeout submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format, as appropriate to the document, and transmitted via an Internet-based submittal service that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email.
Georgia Highway Garage ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000 - 1 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS 1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to Requests for Interpretation (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, Contractor's correction punchlist, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service. 3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in allowable format. 4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants are to be permitted to use the service at no extra charge. 5. Users of the service need an email address, internet access, and PDF review software that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat, www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software capability is provided by the service provider. 6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed electronic documents will not be reviewed. 7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts. B. Cost: The Cost of the service is to be paid by the Contractor. C. Training: One, one-hour, web-based training session shall be made available for all participants, if necessary, with representatives of Architect and Contractor participating; further training is the responsibility of the user of the service. D. Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner.
3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. D. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, all participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor.
Georgia Highway Garage ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000 - 2 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. B. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of RFIs log and status of responses. 7. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 8. Maintenance of progress schedule. 9. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 10. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to work. C. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of work, with a general outline for remainder of work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
3.05 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) A. Definition: A request seeking one of the following: 1. An interpretation, amplification, or clarification of some requirement of Contract Documents arising from inability to determine from them the exact material, process, or system to be installed; or when the elements of construction are required to occupy the same space (interference); or when an item of work is described differently at more than one place in Contract Documents. 2. A resolution to an issue which has arisen due to field conditions and affects design intent. B. Whenever possible, request clarifications at the next appropriate project progress meeting, with response entered into meeting minutes, rendering unnecessary the issuance of a formal RFI. C. Preparation: Prepare an RFI immediately upon discovery of a need for interpretation of Contract Documents. Failure to submit a RFI in a timely manner is not a legitimate cause for claiming additional costs or delays in execution of the work. 1. Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item.
Georgia Highway Garage ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000 - 3 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS 2. Prepare using software provided by the Electronic Document Submittal Service. 3. Combine RFI and its attachments into a single electronic file. PDF format is preferred. D. Reason for the RFI: Prior to initiation of an RFI, carefully study all Contract Documents to confirm that information sufficient for their interpretation is definitely not included. 1. Include in each request Contractor's signature attesting to good faith effort to determine from Contract Documents information requiring interpretation. 2. Unacceptable Uses for RFIs: Do not use RFIs to request the following:: a. Approval of submittals (use procedures specified elsewhere in this section). b. Approval of substitutions (see Section - 01 6000 - Product Requirements) c. Changes that entail change in Contract Time and Contract Sum (comply with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract). 3. Frivolous RFIs: Requests regarding information that is clearly indicated on, or reasonably inferable from, Contract Documents, with no additional input required to clarify the question. They will be returned without a response, with an explanatory notation. E. Responses: Content of answered RFIs will not constitute in any manner a directive or authorization to perform extra work or delay the project. If in Contractor's belief it is likely to lead to a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time, promptly issue a notice to this effect, and follow up with an appropriate Change Order request to Owner.
3.06 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit to Architect for review a schedule for submittals in tabular format. 1. Submit at the same time as the preliminary schedule specified in Section - 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule and schedule of values. 3. Format schedule to allow tracking of status of submittals throughout duration of construction. 4. Account for time required for preparation, review, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery when establishing submittal delivery and review deadline dates.
3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents. C. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.
3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports.
Georgia Highway Garage ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000 - 4 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.
3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.10 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected. B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
3.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Requirements: 1. Submit separate packages of submittals for review and submittals for information, when included in the same specification section. 2. Transmit using approved form. 3. Sequentially identify each item. For revised submittals use original number and a sequential combination numberical and alphabetical suffix. 4. Identify: Project; Contractor; subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number; and specification section number and article/paragraph, as appropriate on each copy. 5. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. a. Submittals from sources other than the Contractor, or without Contractor's stamp will not be acknowledged, reviewed, or returned. 6. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. a. For each submittal for review, allow 10 business days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. 7. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. 8. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. 9. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
Georgia Highway Garage ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000 - 5 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS 10. Distribute reviewed submittals. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. 11. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. B. Product Data Procedures: 1. Submit only information required by individual specification sections. 2. Collect required information into a single submittal. 3. Do not submit (Material) Safety Data Sheets for materials or products. C. Shop Drawing Procedures: 1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting Contract Documents and coordinating related work. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents to create shop drawings. 3. Generic, non-project-specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000 - 6 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. Quality assurance. C. References and standards. D. Testing and inspection agencies and services. E. Control of installation. F. Mock-ups. G. Tolerances. H. Manufacturers' field services. I. Defect Assessment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information. C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit one copy of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information. D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.
Georgia Highway Garage QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1 February 19, 2021 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
1.04 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: B. Designer Qualifications: Where professional engineering design services and design data submittals are specifically required of Contractor by Contract Documents, provide services of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Comply with reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.06 Testing and Inspection Agencies and Services A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
Georgia Highway Garage QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 2 February 19, 2021 2.02 MOCK-UPS A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. B. Accepted mock-ups establish the standard of quality the Architect will use to judge the Work. C. Integrated Exterior Mock-ups: Construct integrated exterior mock-up as indicated on drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products as required in individual Specification Sections. Provide adequate supporting structure for mock-up materials as necessary. D. Provide supervisory personnel who will oversee mock-up construction. Provide workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. E. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. F. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. G. Obtain Architect's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 1. Make corrections as necessary until Architect's approval is issued. H. Architect will use accepted mock-ups as a comparison standard for the remaining Work. I. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining work.
2.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
2.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-compliance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities:
Georgia Highway Garage QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 3 February 19, 2021 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. E. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor.
2.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance equipment, and ______as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
2.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 01 4100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY of Reference Standards A. Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following: B. 28 CFR 35 - Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability in State and Local Government Services; Final Rule; Department of Justice; current edition. C. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition. D. Vermont Access Rules; 2012 as amended E. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. F. 29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. G. Vermont Fire and Building Safety Code, 2015 H. Vermont Electrical Safety Rules, 2017 I. Vermont Plumbing Rules, 2015 J. State of Vermont Commercial Building Energy Standards, Current Edition 1. See Section 01 4110, Certificate Forms.
1.02 State of Vermont amendments to some or all of the following: A. NFPA 1 - Fire Code; 2018. B. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. ICC (IPC) - International Plumbing Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. ICC (IECC) - International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100 - 1 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100 - 2 February 19, 2021 SECTION 01 4110 COMMERCIAL BULDING ENERGY STANDARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Vermont Commercial Building Energy Standards (CBES), Current Edition. 1. URL: https://publicservice.vermont.gov/energy_efficiency/cbes
1.02 RELATED REFERENCES A. Section 01 8316 - Exterior Envelope Performance Requirements
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Sheet Protector A. Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inches B. Thickness: 3 mil minimum. C. Color: Clear D. Manufacturer(s): 1. Avery; Secure Top Sheet Protectors; Model: 76000: (https://www.avery.com/) 2. Staples; Heavyweight Sheet Protectors; Model 34749-US (https://www.staples.com) 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Certificate A. Upon substantial completion of the project, the contractor shall coordinate the completion of the VT Commercial Building Energy Standards (CBES) Certificate including supporting information: 1. Supporting Information a. Design Affidavits to be completed by the Architect, Mechanical Engineer, and Electrical Engineer. b. Construction Affidavit to be completed by the Contractor. c. Documentation of Compliance Path. B. Contractor to post a copy of the Certicate with supporting materials in a Sheet Protector adjacent to building's main electical service panel prior to final inspection for Certificate of Occupancy. C. Contractor to submit a copy of the Certificate with Supporting information to: 1. Department of Public Service Energy Efficiency Division 112 State Street Montpelier, VT 05620-2601 END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage COMMERCIAL BULDING 01 4110 - 1 February 19, 2021 ENERGY STANDARDS Georgia Highway Garage COMMERCIAL BULDING 01 4110 - 2 February 19, 2021 ENERGY STANDARDS SECTION 01 4533 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Code-required special inspections. B. Submittals.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. AHJ: Authority having jurisdiction.
1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Code or Building Code: ICC (IBC)-2015, Edition of the International Building Code and specifically, Chapter 17 - Special Inspections and Tests. B. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Agency or individual officially empowered to enforce the building, fire and life safety code requirements of the permitting jurisdiction in which the Project is located. C. Special Inspection: 1. Special inspections are inspections and testing of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections mandated by the AHJ that also require special expertise to ensure compliance with the approved Contract Documents and the referenced standards. 2. Special inspections are separate from and independent of tests and inspections conducted by Owner or Contractor for the purposes of quality assurance and contract administration.
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ICC (IBC)-2015 - International Building Code; 2015.
1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Reference only - refer to statement of special inspections on structural drawings. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 4533 - 1 February 19, 2021 INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES Georgia Highway Garage CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 4533 - 2 February 19, 2021 INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dewatering B. Temporary utilities. C. Temporary telecommunications services. D. Temporary sanitary facilities. E. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. F. Security requirements. G. Vehicular access and parking. H. Waste removal facilities and services. I. Project identification sign. J. Field offices.
1.02 Dewatering A. Provide temporary means and methods for dewatering all temporary facilities and controls. B. Maintain temporary facilities in operable condition.
1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. New permanent facilities may not be used without prior written consent of the Owner.
1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include: 1. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; Cable modem or faster.
1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
1.06 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.07 FENCING A. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular gates with locks.
Georgia Highway Garage TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 01 5000 - 1 February 19, 2021 CONTROLS 1.08 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.
1.09 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.
1.11 WASTE REMOVAL A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements. B. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. C. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. D. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.
1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on drawings. B. Erect on site at location established by Architect. C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.
1.13 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack, and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. 1. Compliance with COVID-19 spacing protocols as required. C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures.
1.14 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial Completion inspection.
Georgia Highway Garage TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 01 5000 - 2 February 19, 2021 CONTROLS B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 01 5000 - 3 February 19, 2021 CONTROLS Georgia Highway Garage TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 01 5000 - 4 February 19, 2021 CONTROLS SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Sustainable design-related product requirements. C. Re-use of existing products. D. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. E. Product option requirements. F. Substitution limitations. G. Procedures for Owner-supplied products. H. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Lists of products to be removed from existing building. B. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Identification of Owner-supplied products. C. Section 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures: Substitutions made during procurement and/or construction phases. D. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. E. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Requirements for VOC-restricted product categories. F. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Waste disposal requirements potentially affecting product selection, packaging and substitutions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 260.13 - Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims; Federal Trade Commission; Recycled Content; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Products made of wood particles and/or plant material pressed and bonded with adhesive or resin such as particleboard, medium density fiberboard (MDF), plywood, wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates, and door cores.
Georgia Highway Garage PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 1 February 19, 2021 B. Health Product Declarations (HPD): Complete, published declaration with full disclosure of known hazards, prepared using one of the HPDC (HPD-OLT) online tools. C. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Made from agricultural products that are typically harvested within a 10-year or shorter cycle. D. Reused Products: Materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified. 1. Wood fabricated from timber abandoned in transit after harvesting is considered reused, not recycled. 2. Acceptable Evidence: Information about the origin or source, from Contractor or supplier.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner. C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. D. Specific Products to be Reused: The reuse of certain materials and equipment already existing on the project site is required. 1. See Section 01 1000 for list of items required to be salvaged for reuse and relocation.
2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. B. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional source quality control requirements. C. Use of products having any of the following characteristics is not permitted: 1. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. 2. Containing lead, cadmium, or asbestos. D. Where other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 6116. 2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 6116. 3. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 4. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 5. Result in less construction waste. See Section 01 7419 6. Are made of recycled materials. 7. If made of wood, are made of sustainably harvested wood, wood chips, or wood fiber. 8. Have a published Health Product Declaration (HPD).
2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
Georgia Highway Garage PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 2 February 19, 2021 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS A. See Section 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures.
3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 01 7419.
Georgia Highway Garage PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 3 February 19, 2021 B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 01 6116 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements for Indoor-Emissions-Restricted products. B. Requirements for VOC-Content-Restricted products.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Indoor-Emissions-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories, whether specified or not: 1. Interior paints and coatings applied on site. 2. Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site, including flooring adhesives. 3. Flooring. 4. Composite wood. 5. Products making up wall and ceiling assemblies. 6. Thermal and acoustical insulation. 7. Other products when specifically stated in the specifications. B. VOC-Content-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories, whether specified or not: 1. Interior paints and coatings applied on site. 2. Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site, including flooring adhesives. C. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier. D. Adhesives: All gunnable, trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives, whether specified or not; including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives, and pipe jointing adhesives. E. Sealants: All gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers, whether specified or not; including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers. F. Inherently Non-Emitting Materials: Products composed wholly of minerals or metals, unless they include organic-based surface coatings, binders, or sealants; and specifically the following: 1. Concrete. 2. Metals that are plated, anodized, or powder-coated. 3. Glass. 4. Ceramics. 5. Solid wood flooring that is unfinished and untreated.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings; 2005 (Reapproved 2018). C. CAL (CDPH SM) - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers; 2017, v1.2.
Georgia Highway Garage VOLATILE ORGANIC 01 6116 - 1 February 19, 2021 COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS D. CARB (ATCM) - Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products; California Air Resources Board; current edition. E. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air Resources Board; 2007. F. CHPS (HPPD) - High Performance Products Database; Current Edition at www.chps.net/. G. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Testing Program - Certified Products; Current Edition. H. SCAQMD 1113 - Architectural Coatings; 1977 (Amended 2016). I. SCAQMD 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications; 1989 (Amended 2017). J. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Current Edition. K. UL (GGG) - GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products; Current Edition.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit evidence of compliance.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Indoor Emissions Standard and Test Method: CAL (CDPH SM), using Standard Private Office exposure scenario and the allowable concentrations specified in the method, and range of total VOC's after 14 days. 1. Wet-Applied Products: State amount applied in mass per surface area. 2. Paints and Coatings: Test tinted products, not just tinting bases. 3. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are the following; a. Current UL (GGG) certification. b. Current SCS (CPD) Floorscore certification. c. Current SCS (CPD) Indoor Advantage Gold certification. d. Current listing in CHPS (HPPD) as a low-emitting product. e. Current CRI (GLP) certification. f. Test report showing compliance and stating exposure scenario used. 4. Product data submittal showing VOC content is NOT acceptable evidence. 5. Manufacturer's certification without test report by independent agency is NOT acceptable evidence. B. VOC Content Test Method: 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), or ASTM D3960, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. C. Composite Wood Emissions Standard: CARB (ATCM) for ultra-low emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current SCS "No Added Formaldehyde (NAF)" certification; www.scscertified.com. b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. c. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section.
Georgia Highway Garage VOLATILE ORGANIC 01 6116 - 2 February 19, 2021 COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. All Products: Comply with the most stringent of federal, State, and local requirements, or these specifications. B. Indoor-Emissions-Restricted Products: Comply with Indoor Emissions Standard and Test Method, except for: 1. Composite Wood, Wood Fiber, and Wood Chip Products: Comply with Composite Wood Emissions Standard or contain no added formaldehyde resins. 2. Inherently Non-Emitting Materials. C. VOC-Content-Restricted Products: VOC content not greater than required by the following: 1. Adhesives, Including Flooring Adhesives: SCAQMD 1168 Rule. 2. Joint Sealants: SCAQMD 1168 Rule. 3. Paints and Coatings: Each color; most stringent of the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. b. SCAQMD 1113 Rule. c. CARB (SCM).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner. B. Additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will be borne by Contractor. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage VOLATILE ORGANIC 01 6116 - 3 February 19, 2021 COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS Georgia Highway Garage VOLATILE ORGANIC 01 6116 - 4 February 19, 2021 COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS SECTION 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Pre-installation meetings. C. Cutting and patching. D. Surveying for laying out the work. E. Cleaning and protection. F. Starting of systems and equipment. G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. H. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures. I. General requirements for maintenance service.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, Electronic document submittal service. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. C. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. D. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties, and bonds. E. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For surveying work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of surveyor's Errors and Omissions
Georgia Highway Garage EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000 - 1 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. Employ only individual(s) trained and experienced in collecting and recording accurate data relevant to ongoing construction activities, B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located. Employ only individual(s) trained and experienced in establishing and maintaining horizontal and vertical control points necessary for laying out construction work on project of similar size, scope and/or complexity. C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Use of explosives is not permitted. B. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. C. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. D. Perform dewatering activities, as required, for the duration of the project. E. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. F. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. G. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. H. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. I. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. J. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
Georgia Highway Garage EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000 - 2 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with one copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
Georgia Highway Garage EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000 - 3 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations; and ______. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations, and ______. H. Periodically verify layouts by same means. I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-complying work. C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
Georgia Highway Garage EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000 - 4 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element. I. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.
3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.
3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible.
3.09 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
Georgia Highway Garage EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000 - 5 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training. B. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
3.12 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F. Clean filters of operating equipment. G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and drainage systems. H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect. F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.
Georgia Highway Garage EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000 - 6 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion final inspection. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion.
3.14 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000 - 7 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS Georgia Highway Garage EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000 - 8 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Clean dimensional wood. 5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps; see Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing for use options. 6. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 7. Glass. 8. Gypsum drywall and plaster. E. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, incineration, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports. F. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. G. The following sources may be useful in developing the Waste Management Plan: H. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. I. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: List of items to be salvaged from the existing building for relocation in project or for Owner. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. C. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services.
Georgia Highway Garage CONSTRUCTION WASTE 01 7419 - 1 February 19, 2021 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL D. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling.
1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. 4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal.
Georgia Highway Garage CONSTRUCTION WASTE 01 7419 - 2 February 19, 2021 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to incinerators. c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards. c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements for substitution submission procedures.
Georgia Highway Garage CONSTRUCTION WASTE 01 7419 - 3 February 19, 2021 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL B. For each proposed product substitution, submit the following information in addition to requirements specified in Section 01 6000: 1. Relative amount of waste produced, compared to specified product. 2. Cost savings on waste disposal, compared to specified product, to be deducted from the Contract Price. 3. Proposed disposal method for waste product. 4. Markets for recycled waste product.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 3000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. See Section 01 5000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C. See Section 01 6000 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. D. See Section 01 7000 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.
3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect. C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Prebid meeting. 2. Preconstruction meeting. 3. Regular job-site meetings. E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. Provide containers as required. 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse.
Georgia Highway Garage CONSTRUCTION WASTE 01 7419 - 4 February 19, 2021 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage CONSTRUCTION WASTE 01 7419 - 5 February 19, 2021 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Georgia Highway Garage CONSTRUCTION WASTE 01 7419 - 6 February 19, 2021 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project record documents. B. Operation and maintenance data. C. Warranties and bonds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
Georgia Highway Garage CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 1 February 19, 2021 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Details not on original Contract drawings.
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products.
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products.
Georgia Highway Garage CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 2 February 19, 2021 C. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Include test and balancing reports. K. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Format: 1. One Physical copies in Binders to Owner arranged as described below. 2. One Electronic PDF Copy to Owner a. Organize Electronic Copy in same format as physical copy b. Provide one PDF per physical binder B. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. C. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. D. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. E. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. F. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. G. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. H. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. I. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. J. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. K. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows: 1. Project Directory. 2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume.
Georgia Highway Garage CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 3 February 19, 2021 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category. a. Source data. b. Operation and maintenance data. c. Field quality control data. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. All software-operated systems. 2. HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Plumbing equipment. 4. Electrical systems and equipment. 5. Items specified in individual product Sections. C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for: 1. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes. 2. Fixtures and fittings. 3. Items specified in individual product Sections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority. 2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. 3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority. 4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred, or newer. B. Draft Training Plans: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level of attendees. 1. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor.
Georgia Highway Garage DEMONSTRATION AND 01 7900 - 1 February 19, 2021 TRAINING C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data. D. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session for Owner's subsequent use. 1. Format: DVD Disc. 2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner. B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless Owner personnel training is specified. C. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable. D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. E. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.
3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL A. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans submitted. B. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. C. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor. D. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Commissioning Authority. E. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.
Georgia Highway Garage DEMONSTRATION AND 01 7900 - 2 February 19, 2021 TRAINING F. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed and will provide approval forms. G. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up" time. H. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals. I. Product- and System-Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. J. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage DEMONSTRATION AND 01 7900 - 3 February 19, 2021 TRAINING Georgia Highway Garage DEMONSTRATION AND 01 7900 - 4 February 19, 2021 TRAINING SECTION 01 8316 EXTERIOR ENVELOPE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements for on-site full building air leakage testing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, project meetings, progress schedules and documentation, reports, coordination. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Procedures for testing, inspection, mock-ups, reports, certificates; use of reference standards. C. Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements: Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures; preinstallation meetings; cutting and patching; cleaning and protection; starting of systems; demonstration and instruction; closeout procedures except payment procedures; requirements for alterations work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. Vermont Commercial Building Energy Standards (CBES); Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Testing Company's Qualification Statement. C. Test Reports: Indicate as required in this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 BUILDING AIR LEAKAGE TESTING A. Air Leakage and Air Sealing Testing - General 1. Air leakage of the building envelope shall be subject to field tests conducted by a qualified testing agency approved by the Owner at the stage when the building is weathertight, insulated, and the vapor retarder and air barriers are installed. The continuous air barrier must be in place for this test to be meaningful. Such inspections and tests shall not relieve the Subcontractors of responsibility for providing their own inspections, quality control and materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Pressurized fog testing of the exterior wall mock-up with all constituent components in place to verify execution of intended air seal details and workmanship. Mock-up test to include no less than one exterior door and window. a. Pressurized fog test to occur prior to the installation of exterior windows and doors. 3. A blower door test will be performed near the end of the project that verifies the infiltration goal of an envelope rating of 0.30 cfm per square foot at 75Pa of exterior shell area (including below grade walls and slabs) when testing per ASTM E-779 requirements. The testing shall be performed with all building HVAC exterior penetrations sealed air tight. Refer to Paragraph below for Air Sealing and Air Leakage Test protocols. The sealing and Georgia Highway Garage EXTERIOR ENVELOPE 01 8316 - 1 February 19, 2021 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS testing procedures' shall be reviewed ahead of time and approved by the Owner and Construction Manager. 4. A second test shall immediately follow the first with all HVAC sealing removed to determine the natural building infiltration rate for comparison to design values used. B. Owner's Responsibilities 1. The Owner shall hire an Independent Testing Agency to perform testing specified in this section. The cost of this field testing shall be paid for by the Construction Manager. If Work is found not to conform to the Contract Documents, the responsible party shall be responsible for the cost of further testing. 2. Required Tests a. Final Compliance Test: The Construction Manager shall schedule the Independent Testing Agency when the building is totally enclosed, fully insulated, air barrier is installed and completed, windows and doors are installed, and all mechanical equipment is operational and items penetrating the building envelope are installed. 3. The Independent Testing Agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state test results, and compliance or deviations with performance requirements in a report to be issued to the Owner, Architect and Construction Manager. 4. Conduct testing in the presence of the Owners representative. 5. If any test fails then a diagnostic review shall be performed with the testing agency, construction team, design team to identify causes of failures, methods to resolve and retesting after remediation of deficiencies. The Owner shall carry all costs of these activities as well as be responsible for all remedial activities required to achieve the project goals. C. Air Leakage and Air Sealing Tests 1. Equipment shall be provided as required by the Independent Testing Agency during the test. Prior to all testing, the Construction Manager shall verify that all openings in the mechanical systems previously sealed are closed and sealed with polyethylene and tape. Post test, the Contruction Manager shall verify that all openings are opened and damper positions reset for the proper normal operation of the mechanical system. 2. Preparation: Prior to the testing agency's Air Leakage Test, the Construction Manager, with the assistance of subcontractors as he deems, shall temporarily seal the following a. Ventilation intake and exhaust hoods. Intake and exhaust grills for units within the building shall be sealed at the exterior, in order to include the air handler and the ducting in the air leakage test. HVAC units with mechanically operated dampers on intake and exhaust openings may be tested with the dampers closed. b. Intake and exhaust for rooftop units shall be sealed outdoors, so as to include the rooftop unit in the air leakage test. Intake and exhaust louvers or grilles in penthouses shall be sealed at the exterior to allow air leakage testing of air handlers and ducting. The means of sealing openings shall be as directed by the testing agency. HVAC units with mechanically operated dampers on intake and exhaust openings may be tested with the dampers closed. c. Floor drains or plumbing stacks or drains open to the outside. d. Holes in exterior doors where hardware is not yet installed. e. Outdoor louver for make-up combustion air to the boiler. f. Openings to areas of the building not under test. g. Other openings that are intentional and will be permanently closed off when construction is complete and the building is fully occupied. 3. The blower door contractor shall verify the following before testing: a. That windows and doors are closed and latched. b. That the section of the building under test is effectively isolated from the remainder of the building (if the building is being tested in sections). c. That the boiler and other combustion equipment are off. Georgia Highway Garage EXTERIOR ENVELOPE 01 8316 - 2 February 19, 2021 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS d. That wind speeds are below 15 mph for the duration of the test period. Tests shall be postponed if wind speeds are above 15 mph. D. Retesting: If the building fails to meet Air Leakage Performance Requirements after any test, all related corrective work and retesting shall be conducted at the Contractor's expense. E. At the completion of testing, the Independent Testing Agency shall submit a certificate of compliance to the Owners representative stating that the building envelope meets the maximum air leakage criteria. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage EXTERIOR ENVELOPE 01 8316 - 3 February 19, 2021 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Georgia Highway Garage EXTERIOR ENVELOPE 01 8316 - 4 February 19, 2021 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 03 0516 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER - STEGO
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2018a. B. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2017.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor barrier to be used. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Barrier: 1. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms, maximum. 2. Complying with ASTM E1745 Class A. 3. Thickness: 15 mils. 4. Basis of Design: a. Stego Industries LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil): www.stegoindustries.com/#sle. B. Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surface over which vapor barrier is to be installed is complete and ready before proceeding with installation of vapor barrier.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643. B. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade; lap sheet over footings and seal to foundation walls. C. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. D. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. E. No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.
Georgia Highway Garage UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER - 03 0516 - 1 February 19, 2021 STEGO F. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER - 03 0516 - 2 February 19, 2021 STEGO SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings. B. Sheathing. C. Fire retardant treated wood materials. D. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. E. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. B. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2010 (Reapproved 2017). C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2018. E. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2020.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and sheathing products.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee at www.alsc.org, and who provides grading
Georgia Highway Garage ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 1 February 19, 2021 service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Other Applications: 1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C Plugged or better, Exterior grade. 2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better. 3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better.
2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground. 2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated . c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet.
Georgia Highway Garage ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 2 February 19, 2021 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. D. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Provide the following specific nonstructural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane, Other than Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.
3.05 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 1. Comply with applicable regulations.
Georgia Highway Garage ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 3 February 19, 2021 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities. B. Do not leave wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 06 8316 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels. B. Trim.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 09 2216 - Non Structural Metal Framing
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 9 CFR 416.2 - Regulatory Requirements Under the Federal Meat Inspection Act and the Poultry Products Inspection Act, Part 416-Sanitation; current edition. B. ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics; 2010 (Reapproved 2018). C. ASTM D2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of Barcol Impressor; 2013a. D. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016. E. ASTM D5319 - Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling Panels; 2017. F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Samples: Submit One sample __2__by__2__ inch in size illustrating material and surface design of panels.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store panels flat, indoors, on a clean, dry surface. Remove packaging and allow panels to acclimate to room temperature for 48 hours prior to installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels: 1. Nudo Products, Inc; FiberLite and FiberCorr: www.nudo.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PANEL SYSTEMS A. Wall Panels at Mechanical Room/Mop Sink: 1. Panel Size: 4 by 8 feet.
Georgia Highway Garage FIBERGLASS REINFORCED 06 8316 - 1 February 19, 2021 PANELING 2. Panel Thickness: 0.09 inch. 3. Surface Design: Embossed, as approved by Architect. 4. Color: As selected by Architect. 5. Attachment Method: Adhesive only, with trim and sealant in joints. B. FiberCorr: Composite Wall Panel with FRP Face at Wash Bay demising wall. 1. Panel Size: 4 by 10 feet. 2. Panel Thickness: 0.320 inch. 3. Surface Design: Pebbled a. Color: As selected by architect from Manufacturer's full line.
2.03 MATERIALS A. Panels: Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), complying with ASTM D5319. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smoke developed index of 450; when system tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Impact Strength: Greater than 2.8 ft lb force per inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM D256. B. Trim/Division Bars: As required for proper installation to provide concealed fastener installation; color coordinating with panel. C. Fasteners: As directed by panel manufacturer's installation requirements for applicable substrate conditions.. D. Adhesive: Type recommended by panel manufacturer. E. Sealant: Type recommended by panel manufacturer; color matching panel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions and substrate flatness before starting work. B. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION - WALLS A. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cut and drill panels with carbide tipped saw blades, drill bits, or snips. C. Pre-drill fastener holes in panels, 1/8 inch greater in diameter than fastener, spaced as indicated by panel manufacturer. D. Apply adhesive to the back side of the panel using trowel as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. E. Apply panels to wall with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels. F. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints. G. Drive fasteners to provide snug fit, and do not over-tighten. H. Place trim on panel before fastening edges, as required. I. Fill channels in trim with sealant before attaching to panel. J. Install trim with adhesive and screws or nails, as required. K. Seal gaps at floor, ceiling, and between panels with applicable sealant to prevent moisture intrusion.
Georgia Highway Garage FIBERGLASS REINFORCED 06 8316 - 2 February 19, 2021 PANELING L. Remove excess sealant after paneling is installed and prior to curing. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage FIBERGLASS REINFORCED 06 8316 - 3 February 19, 2021 PANELING Georgia Highway Garage FIBERGLASS REINFORCED 06 8316 - 4 February 19, 2021 PANELING SECTION 07 0553 FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Identification markings for fire and smoke rated partitions, and fire rated walls.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of marking, indicating font, foreground and background colors, wording, and overall dimensions.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhered markings when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by label or sign manufacturer. B. Do not install painted markings when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by coating manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Partition Identification Labels: 1. Fire Wall Signs, Inc: www.firewallsigns.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with "Marking and Identification" requirements of "Fire-Resistance Ratings and Fire Tests" chapter of ICC (IBC). 1. Letters must be no less than 3 inches tall, with minimum 3/8" stroke. 2. Letter color must contrast with color of substrate. B. Languages: Provide sign markings in English.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate markings as required by ICC (IBC). B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Protect from damage until Date of Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged markings. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY 07 0553 - 1 February 19, 2021 IDENTIFICATION Georgia Highway Garage FIRE AND SMOKE ASSEMBLY 07 0553 - 2 February 19, 2021 IDENTIFICATION SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall and underside of floor slabs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. 2020 Vermont Commercial Building Energy Standards B. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013 (Reapproved 2019). B. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2018. C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board. B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Graphite polystyrene (GPS) board. C. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.
2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces. 1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88) per 1 inch thickness at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 4. Compressive strength as required - reference structural drawings. B. Expanded Graphite Polystyrene (GPS) Board Insulation: Complying with ASTM C578, Type I. 1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Board Edges: Square. 4. Thermal Resistance: R-4.9/inch minimum (ASTM C518 or ASTM C177)
Georgia Highway Garage THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 1 February 19, 2021 5. Product: a. Insulfoam Platinum GPS b. Type 1 c. R-20 as required by 2020 Vermont CBES d. 48x96 inch panels
2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Products: a. ROCKWOOL (ROXUL, Inc); COMFORTBATT: www.rockwool.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Protection Board for Below Grade Insulation: FRP, 0.060 inch thick. 1. Products: GroundBreaker manufactured by Nudo. a. Length: 50' b. Size: 12" Width c. Finish: Pebbled Gray
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter. 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Install in running bond pattern. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Immediately following application of board insulation, place protective boards over exposed insulation surfaces.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab.
3.04 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in walls as indicated on plans by wall assembly numbers, in spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
Georgia Highway Garage THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 2 February 19, 2021 C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 3 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 07 4113 INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory-formed, preinsulated, metal roof panel cladding sytem, including corresponding metal flashings, sealants, fasteners, clips, and other accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 4213.19 - Insulated Metal Wall Panels B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between metal roof panel system and adjacent construction.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC - Steel Construction Manual, current edition B. AISI - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Structural Members C. ASTM 1. C518-10 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 2. C1363-05 Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 3. C273-07 Standard Test Method for Shear Properties of Sandwich Core Materials. 4. D1621-10 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 5. D1623-09 Standard Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 6. D1622-08 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 7. D6226-10 Standard Test Method for Open Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 8. E72-10 Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 9. E84-10b Standard Test Method of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 10. E1680-11 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems. 11. E1646-95(2011) Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 12. E1592-05 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. D. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2017a. E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 2. Installation methods.
Georgia Highway Garage INSULATED METAL ROOF 07 4113 - 1 February 19, 2021 PANELS C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions. 1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled. D. Selection Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit color chips and chart representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Installation instructions F. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer. G. Letter of Certification stating that all parts of this specification were satisfied.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels in the original manufacturer’s weather-resistant, shrink-wrapped packaging with clearly marked, weather-resistant labeling. B. Store the panels in a clean, level, protected and sufficiently compacted area. Provide ventilation if the bundles are exposed to moisture; further, elevate one end of the bundle to ensure adequate runoff. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion, scratching and denting. C. Use proper care in unloading, storing and installing the wall panels. Handle panels in a fashion that will not bend, dent, scratch or otherwise damage the product.
1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. The manufacturer warrants the panels as free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of (2) years from the date of production. This excludes the material coatings and finishes which are covered under separate warranties. C. The manufacturer warrants the coating system for a period of 30-years subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the manufacturer’s Paint Finish Warranty. D. The installer warrants the panels as free of defects in material installation and workmanship for a period of (2) years from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Insulated Metal Roof Panels: 1. ATAS International, Inc. a. 6612 Snowdrift Road Allentown, PA 18106, www.atas.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
2.02 INSULATED METAL ROOF PANELS A. Insulated Metal Roof Panels: Provide roll-formed interior and exterior profiles chemically bonded to a continuously, foamed-in-place, polyisocyanurate, insulating core. 1. Isoleren RL a. Exterior Profile: Isoleren RL (Standing Seam Roof) 1) Gauge: 24 2) Finish: 70% PVDF b. Interior Profile: Isoleren ML 1) Gauge: 26 2) Finish: 70% PVDF c. Substrate: Galvalume G90 or Stainless Steel
Georgia Highway Garage INSULATED METAL ROOF 07 4113 - 2 February 19, 2021 PANELS d. Panel Thickness: As required to meet Vermont CBES 2020: R-40 1) 5" minimum. e. Panel Width: 42"
2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Clips – 16-ga., 4” wide, 5-hole roof panel clip, or as directed by manufacturer. B. Fasteners - ¼-14 x 2-1/4”, Self-Drilling, Hex Head, with Shoulder, or as directed by manufacturer.
2.04 FINISHES A. Fluoropolymer Coil Coating System: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi-coat superior performing organic coatings system complying with AAMA 2605, including at least 70 percent PVDF resin, and at least 80 percent of coil coated aluminum surfaces having minimum total dry film thickness (DFT) of 0.9 mil, 0.0009 inch; color and gloss as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard line.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Use accessories from same manufacturer as panels where available. B. Flashing: Match all flashings and trims with the adjacent panels in material gauge and finish. Provide all matching trims and flashings. Install these trims per the panel manufacturer’s details. C. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosion resistant finish or combination steel and closed-cell foam. D. Sealants: 1. Sidelap - factory applied batten 2. Exposed Sealant: Elastomeric; silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane. 3. Concealed Sealant: Non-curing butyl sealant or tape sealant. 4. Tape Sealants - Butyl
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks. B. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer. C. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions.
Georgia Highway Garage INSULATED METAL ROOF 07 4113 - 3 February 19, 2021 PANELS Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and structural movement. 1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances. 2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited. B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, caps, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items. C. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations.
3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.
3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage INSULATED METAL ROOF 07 4113 - 4 February 19, 2021 PANELS SECTION 07 4213.19 INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory-assembled metal panel system for walls, with trim, related flashings and corresponding metal flashings, sealants, fasteners, clips and other accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 4113 - Insulated Metal Roof Panels B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between metal wall panel system and adjacent construction.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2018. B. AISC - Steel Construction Manual C. AISI - North American Specification for the design of Cold-Formed Structural Members D. ASCE - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures E. ASTM 1. C518-10 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus 2. C273-07 Standard Test Method for Shear Properties of Sandwich Core Materials. 3. E84-10b Standard Test Method of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. E330/E330M Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014 F. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2017a.
1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer documentation on tested structural and thermal capabilities of assembled panel. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Showing elevations, panel layout and calling out panel profile, thickness, gauge, width, finish and texture. The drawings shall also illustrate product components including fasteners, clips, sealants, trims and any other necessary accessories. 2. Engineering package illustrating the panels will resist the code stipulated loads. D. Color chip, and chart. E. Design and Performance Data: Indicate panel profile and dimensions. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special handling criteria.
Georgia Highway Garage INSULATED METAL WALL 07 4213.19 - 1 February 19, 2021 PANELS G. Warranty Documentation for Installation of Building Rainscreen Assembly: Submit installer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with installer. H. Letter of Certification stating that all parts of this specification were satisfied.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer - Experienced in the production of continuously, foamed-in-place, insulated metal wall panels. B. Installer - Authorized by the manufacturer and having a minimum of 3 years experiance installing insulated metal wall panels.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. B. Store pre-finished material off ground with weather protection to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. Do not stack more than two bundles high. C. Use proper care in unloading, storing and installing the wall panels. Handel panels in a fashion that will not bend, dent, scratch or otherwise damage the product. D. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
1.08 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer warrants the panels as free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of (2) years from the date of production. B. The manufacturer warrants the GALVALUME® substrate for a period of 20-years subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the manufacturer’s Product Warranty C. The installer warrants the panels as free of defects in material installation and workmanship for a period of (2) years from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Insulated Metal Wall Panels: 1. ATAS International, Inc; Isoleren SL: www.atas.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PANEL SYSTEM A. Metal Panel System: : “Insulated Metal Wall Panels” consisting of roll-formed interior and exterior profiles chemically bonded to a continuously, foamed-in-place, polyisocyanurate, insulating core. 1. Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system. 2. Accommodate tolerances of building structural framing. 3. Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. 4. Provide continuity of vapor retarder at building enclosure elements. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Thermal Performance: Provide thermal resistance through entire system; R-value of 22.1 deg F hr sq ft/Btu, minimum.
Georgia Highway Garage INSULATED METAL WALL 07 4213.19 - 2 February 19, 2021 PANELS 2. Structural Performance: Design and size to withstand all dead loads and wind loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of panel. a. Verify structural performance in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using test pressure 1.5 times design wind pressure, with 10 seconds duration of maximum load. 3. Movement: Accommodate the movement caused by the following without damage to system, components, or deterioration of seals: a. Normal movement between system components. b. Seasonal temperature cycling. c. Deflection of structural support framing,
2.03 PANELS AND TRIM A. Wall Panels: Exterior and interior metal sheet skin, factory-assembled, with foamed in place insulation; exterior and interior sheet interlocking at edges, fitted with continuous gaskets. 1. Panel Width: 42" inch. 2. Exterior Profile: Isoloren SL; vertical panels. 3. Interior Profile: Isoloren ML. 4. Panel Thickness: 3 inch. a. OR as required to meet Vermont CBES 2020: R-22.1 5. Exterior Sheet: Pre-finished galvanized steel, 22 gauge, 0.0299 inch minimum base metal thickness; ______. 6. Interior Sheet: Galvanized steel, pre-finished, 22 gauge, 0.0299 inch minimum base metal thickness. 7. Exterior Finish: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating; color as selected from manufacturer's standard range. 8. Interior Finish: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating; color as selected from manufacturer's standard range.
2.04 PANEL MATERIALS A. Precoated Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS) or Forming Steel (FS), with G90/Z275 coating; continuous-coil-coated with acrylic primer coat, silicone polyester top coat, and polyester washcoat for panel back. 1. Color of Exposed Exterior Surfaces: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. B. Foamed-in-Place Insulation: Urethane type.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Flashing: Match all flashings and trims with the adjacent panels in material gauge and finish. Provide all matching trims and flashings. Install these trims per the panel manufacturers details. B. Clips: 14-ga., 4", 5-hole wall panel clip. C. Fasteners: ¼-14, Self-Drilling or Self-Tapping, Hex Head of appropriate length. D. Closures: UV resistant per the manufacturer’s details (if necessary). E. Subgirts: As required for system design. F. Sealers 1. Tube Sealants a. Non-skinning butyl b. Polyurethane 2. Tape Sealants
Georgia Highway Garage INSULATED METAL WALL 07 4213.19 - 3 February 19, 2021 PANELS a. Butyl
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that structural framing is ready to receive panel system. B. During installation, examine the individual panels. Immediately notify the manufacturer of any panel defects. Do not install defective panels.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install panel system on walls and soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Permanently fasten panel system to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb, within specified tolerances. C. Locate panel joints over supports. D. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. E. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance.
3.03 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage INSULATED METAL WALL 07 4213.19 - 4 February 19, 2021 PANELS SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping of joints and penetrations in fire-resistance-rated and smoke-resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's qualification statement.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days after installation of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Firestopping Manufacturers: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products; _____: www.3m.com/firestop/#sle. 2. Hilti, Inc; _____: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. 3. Nelson FireStop Products; _____: www.nelsonfirestop.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of materials as required for tested firestopping assembly. B. Products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than indicated in SCAQMD 1168. C. Firstopping and Smoke Stopping Performance Requirements 1. Listed Firestop Systems are required. Use only firestop systems listed by UL or other laboratories acceptable by AHJ. 2. As tested by ASTM E814, F rating shall be equal to fire rating of the assembly being penetrated and T rating shall comply with building code requirements.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRESTOPPING 07 8400 - 1 February 19, 2021 3. Single Source: ALL firestop products used on the project shall be from the same manufacturer. 4. Chemical Compatabilty: Products in contact with plastic pipe shall be compatible. D. See Drawings for Basis of Design products
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings.
3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage FIRESTOPPING 07 8400 - 2 February 19, 2021 SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants. C. Joint backings and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Additional requirements for sealants and primers. B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Setting exterior door thresholds in sealant. C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings. D. Section 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Sealing between framing and adjacent construction in acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer; 2015. B. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2017. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018. D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. E. ASTM C1311 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants; 2014. F. UL 263 - Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be used, that includes the following. 1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and color availability. 2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product. 3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 4. Substrates the product should not be used on. 5. Substrates for which use of primer is required. 6. Substrates for which laboratory adhesion and/or compatibility testing is required. C. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each product to be used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and recommended tools. D. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color cards showing standard colors available for selection.
Georgia Highway Garage JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1 February 19, 2021 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope: 1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unless specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Wall expansion and control joints. b. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. c. Joints between different exposed materials. d. Openings below ledge angles in masonry. e. Other joints indicated below. 2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. b. Other joints indicated below. 3. Do not seal the following types of joints. a. Intentional weepholes in masonry. b. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other type of sealing device. c. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed. d. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section. e. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.
2.02 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL A. Sealants and Primers: Provide products with levels of volatile organic compound (VOC) content as indicated in Section 01 6116.
2.03 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Color: White. B. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 20 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
Georgia Highway Garage JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 2 February 19, 2021 C. Polyurethane Sealant for Continuous Water Immersion: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for continuous water immersion; suitable for traffic exposure when recessed below traffic surface. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 35 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 20 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F. D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging; not intended for exterior use. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces, Type OP (opaque). 2. Grade: ASTM C834; Grade Minus 18 Degrees C (0 Degrees F). E. Non-Curing Butyl Sealant: Solvent-based, single component, non-sag, non-skinning, non-hardening, non-bleeding; non-vapor-permeable; intended for fully concealed applications.
2.04 SELF-LEVELING SEALANTS A. Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant for Continuous Water Immersion: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade P, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure and continuous water immersion. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 35 to 55, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: Gray. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to, compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specific application. 1. Open Cell: 40 to 50 percent larger in diameter than joint width. 2. Closed Cell and Bi-Cellular: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width. B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application. C. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesive residue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants. D. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, type recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. E. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Georgia Highway Garage JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 3 February 19, 2021 C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. D. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. F. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. G. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface.
3.04 POST-OCCUPANCY A. Post-Occupancy Inspection: Perform visual inspection of entire length of project sealant joints at a time that joints have opened to their greatest width; i.e. at low temperature in thermal cycle. Report failures immediately and repair. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. B. Hollow metal frames for wood doors. C. Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. D. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames. E. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011. C. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003 (R2009). D. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2017. E. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011. F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2018. G. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2018. H. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2018a. I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b. J. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2016. K. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017. L. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. M. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002. N. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011. O. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications For Receipt, Storage and Installation of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2007.
Georgia Highway Garage HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 08 1113 - 1 February 19, 2021 FRAMES P. NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2018. Q. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2014. R. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2019. S. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2017. T. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2013. U. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition. V. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any indicated finish requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years documented experience. B. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 2. Curries, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS) Type B, for each. 2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards. 3. Exterior Door Top Closures: Flush end closure channel, with top and door faces aligned. 4. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated.
Georgia Highway Garage HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 08 1113 - 2 February 19, 2021 FRAMES 5. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush. 6. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. Style: Manufacturers standard. 7. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements. 8. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components zinc-coated (galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames. a. Based on SDI Standards: Provide at least A40/ZF120 (galvannealed) when necessary, coating not required for typical interior door applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) for corrosive locations. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished. B. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated. 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.053 inch, minimum. e. Zinc Coating: A60/ZF180 galvannealed coating; ASTM A653/A653M. 2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance with requirements. a. Foam Plastic Insulation: Manufacturer's standard board insulation with maximum flame spread index (FSI) of 75, and maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84, and completely enclosed within interior of door. 3. Door Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 2.7 minimum. 4. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal. C. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 18 gauge, 0.042 inch, minimum. 2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal. D. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.053 inch, minimum.
Georgia Highway Garage HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 08 1113 - 3 February 19, 2021 FRAMES 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C and NFPA 252 ("positive pressure fire tests"). 3. Provide units listed and labeled by UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR). a. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. 4. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction in compliance with requirements. 5. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal.
2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements. B. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type. 1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating. 2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.053 inch, minimum. 3. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Slip-on type. 1. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.053 inch, minimum. 2. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished. D. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Face welded type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. 2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.053 inch, minimum. 3. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
2.05 FINISHES A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15 mil, 0.015 inch dry film thickness (DFT) per coat; provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 1. Fire-Rated Frames: Comply with fire rating requirements indicated.
2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000. B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.
Georgia Highway Garage HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 08 1113 - 4 February 19, 2021 FRAMES B. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100. E. Comply with glazing installation requirements of Section 08 8000.
3.03 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 08 1113 - 5 February 19, 2021 FRAMES Georgia Highway Garage HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 08 1113 - 6 February 19, 2021 FRAMES SECTION 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; non-rated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011. B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2018). C. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1; 2017, with Errata (2019).
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details. 1. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS). D. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6 by 6 inches in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. F. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section, with not less than three years of experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging, and inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic; do not store in damp or wet areas or areas where sunlight might bleach veneer; seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week, and break seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
Georgia Highway Garage FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1 February 19, 2021 B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. VT Industries, Inc; Heritage Collection: www.vtindustries.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DOORS ______A. Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at each location.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated. 1. FSC Certified 2. No added urea formaldehyde
2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Red oak, veneer grade in accordance with quality standard indicated, quarter cut, with book match between leaves of veneer, running match of spliced veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face.
2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: 1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. C. Glazed Openings: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
2.06 FINISHES - WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent: a. System - 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed. b. Sheen: Satin.
Georgia Highway Garage FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 2 February 19, 2021 B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Hollow Metal Door Frames: See Section 08 1113. B. Glazing: See Section 08 8000. C. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. D. Door Hardware: See Section 08 7100.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
3.03 TOLERANCES A. Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 3 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 08 3513.13 ACCORDION FOLDING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accordion folding doors. B. Track, ceiling guards, and operating hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood supports and blocking for track support.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b. B. ASTM F793/F793M - Standard Classification of Wall Coverings by Use Characteristics; 2015.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on door operation, hardware and accessories, colors and finishes available. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, details of track and required supports, static and dynamic loads, adjacent construction and finish trim, and stacking sizes. D. Samples: Submit two samples of surface finish, 12 x 12 inches size, illustrating quality. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, installation sequence, and ______. F. Maintenance Data: Describe cleaning materials detrimental to vinyl fabric surfaces and hardware finish. Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal methods.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Accordian Folding Doors Manufacturers: 1. Modernfold, a DORMA Group Company; MD800: www.modernfold.com/#sle. 2. Panelfold, Inc; _____: www.panelfold.com/#sle. 3. Woodfold Manufacturing, Inc; _____: www.woodfold.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ACCORDION FOLDING DOORS A. Accordion Door Construction: Non-acoustical. 1. Opening Height: As indicated on drawings. 2. Opening Width: As indicated on drawings. 3. Surfacing: 22 gauge, 0.0299 inch steel panels with sound absorbent liner. 4. Finish: Vinyl coated fabric; color as selected. 5. Trim: Jamb and meeting mullions; intermediate post.
Georgia Highway Garage ACCORDION FOLDING DOORS 08 3513.13 - 1 February 19, 2021 B. Track: Formed steel; 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 inches size; thickness and profile designed to support loads; steel sub-channel. C. Carriers: Nylon wheels on trolley carrier at top center of every second fold, with threaded pendant bolt for vertical adjustment.
2.03 FINISH MATERIALS A. Vinyl Coated Fabric: ASTM F793/F793M Category IV, polyvinyl fluoride finish. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, Class A; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard range.
2.04 COMPONENTS A. Trim: Aluminum moldings, mill finish. B. Hardware: Latching door handles of cast steel, satin chrome finish; lock cylinder keyed to building keying system, with jamb lock and pull bars.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit and align door assembly level and plumb. C. Lubricate moving components.
3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door to provide smooth operation from stacked to full open position. B. Visually inspect door in fully closed position for light leaks to identify a potential acoustical leak, and adjust to achieve light tight seal.
3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstrate operation of door and identify potential operational problems. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage ACCORDION FOLDING DOORS 08 3513.13 - 2 February 19, 2021 SECTION 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead sectional doors, electrically operated. B. Operating hardware and supports. C. Electrical controls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2018. B. ASTM A216 - Specifications for sectional overhead type doors. C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. D. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014. E. DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; 2011. F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts; 2000, with Errata (2008). G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014. H. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018. I. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition. J. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Show anchorage method, hardware, and installation methods. D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements.
Georgia Highway Garage SECTIONAL DOORS 08 3613 - 1 February 19, 2021 B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for electric motor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Sectional Doors: 1. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation; Thermospan 200: www.wayne-dalton.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 INSULATED SECTIONAL OVERHEAD STEEL DOORS A. Steel Doors: Flush steel, insulated; standard lift operating style with track and hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application. 1. Door Nominal Thickness: 2 inches thick. 2. Thermal Value: R-17.5 miminum. 3. Exterior Finish: Factory finished with polyester baked enamel; Color selected by architect from Custom "TruChoice" Color System. 4. Interior Finish: Factory finished with acrylic baked enamel; color as selected from manufacturers standard line. 5. Glazed Lights: Full panel width, two rows; Tempered double Insulating Glass (1/2"). 6. Electric Operation: Electric control station. a. Provide UL listed electric operator B. Exteror Steel: 0.015 inch, hot dipped galvanized. 1. Flush, non-repeating random stucco texture. C. Interior Steel: 0.015 inch, hot dipped galvanized. 1. Flush, non-repeating random stucco texture. D. Glazing: Annealed float glass; single pane; clear; 1/8 inch overall thickness.
2.03 COMPONENTS A. Track: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.090 inch minimum thickness; 2 inch wide, continuous one piece per side; galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch thick. 1. High Lift 2. Horizontal track shall be reinforced with continuous angleor adequate length to minimize deflection. 3. Vertical track shall be graduated to provide wedge type weathertight closing with continuous angle mounting for steel or wood jambs, and shall be fully adjustable to seal door at jambs. B. Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient flexible bulb-type rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact. C. Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section full height of jamb, fitted with resilient weatherstripping, placed in moderate contact with door panels. D. Flexible Head Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full length. E. Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length. F. Lock: Inside center mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to retain in locked or retracted position; interior and exterior handle.
Georgia Highway Garage SECTIONAL DOORS 08 3613 - 2 February 19, 2021 2.04 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G60/Z180 coating, plain surface. B. Float Glass: Provide float glass glazing, unless noted otherwise. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). C. Insulation: Foamed-in-place polyurethane, bonded to facing.
2.05 ELECTRIC OPERATION A. Electric Operators: 1. Mounting: Side mounted on cross head shaft. 2. Motor Enclosure: 3. Motor Rating: As required hp; continuous duty. 4. Motor Voltage: 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 5. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 6. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. 7. Opening Speed: []ot less than 2/3 foot, nor more than 1 foot per second. 8. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. 9. Manual override in case of power failure. B. Control Station: Provide standard three button (Open-Close-Stop) momentary-contact control device for each operator complying with UL 325. 1. 24 volt circuit. 2. [] mounted, at locations indicated on drawings. 3. Entrapment Protection Devices: Provide sensing devices and safety mechanisms complying with UL 325. a. Primary Device: Provide electric sensing edge, wireless sensing, NEMA 1 photo eye sensors, or NEMA 4X photo eye sensors as required with momentary-contact control device. C. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of sectional door panel, full width; electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop and reverse door direction upon striking object; hollow neoprene covered to provide weatherstrip seal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal. B. Apply primer to wood frame.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.
Georgia Highway Garage SECTIONAL DOORS 08 3613 - 3 February 19, 2021 C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to unit components.
3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping. B. Have manufacturer's field representative present to confirm proper operation and identify adjustments to door assembly for specified operation.
3.06 CLEANING A. Clean doors and frames and glazing. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings.
3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage SECTIONAL DOORS 08 3613 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 08 5413 FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated fiberglass windows with fixed and operating sash. B. Glazed by factory. C. Operating hardware. D. Insect screens.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and Skylights; 2017. B. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration Products; 2012. C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. D. ASTM E283/E283M - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Skylights, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2019. E. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016). F. ASTM E783 - Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors; 2002 (Reapproved 2018). G. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2015. H. ASTM E2112 - Standard Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows, Doors and Skylights; 2019c. I. FS L-S-125 - Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic; 1972b, with Notice (1987).
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchors, fasteners, and glass. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work, installation requirements. D. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of the following showing compliance with specified grade: 1. Evidence of AAMA Certification. 2. Evidence of WDMA Certification. 3. Evidence of CSA Certification.
Georgia Highway Garage FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 08 5413 - 1 February 19, 2021 4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Field Quality Control Submittals: Report of field testing for water penetration and air leakage. F. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. B. Jig, brace, and box the window frame assemblies for transport to minimize flexing of members or joints.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.
1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a ten year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass Windows: 1. Pella Corporation; Pella Impervia Windows: www.pellacommercial.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 WINDOW UNITS A. Fiberglass Windows: Hollow, tubular, multi-layer fiber reinforced material; factory fabricated; with vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings: a. Factory mulled: Fixed Picture over Awning 2. Color: as selected by Architect from manufacturers full line.. 3. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 4. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.
2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific window type:
Georgia Highway Garage FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 08 5413 - 2 February 19, 2021 1. Performance Class (PC): LC. B. Design Pressure (DP): In accordance with applicable codes. C. Overall Thermal Transmittance (U-value): 0.25, maximum, including glazing, measured on window sizes required for this project. D. Air Leakage: 0.3 cfm/sq ft maximum leakage when tested at 1.57 psf pressure difference in accordance with ASTM E283/E283M.
2.04 COMPONENTS A. Pultruded, Fiberglass composite with foam inserts 1. Mitered corners 2. Joined and bonded with nylon corner lock, and mechanical fasteners and injected with polyurethane adhesive sealant. 3. Head, Jamb, Sill: contain factory positioned installation screw locations. B. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit. C. Insect Screens: FS L-S-125, woven plastic mesh; 14/18 mesh size. 1. Color: Color as selected.
2.05 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Insulating Glass, multi layer Low-E coated with argon fill, complying with Vermont CBES 2020 glazing requirements.
2.06 HARDWARE A. Awning Sash: Nickle coated worm-gear operator with factory finish, 5 ball bearings. B. Operator Linkage: stainless steel swing arm, and hinge pin. C. Integrated Folding Crank: Baked Enamel - Color to be selected from full range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide services of fiberglass window manufacturer's field representative to observe for proper installation of system and submit report.
Georgia Highway Garage FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 08 5413 - 3 February 19, 2021 B. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent field testing and inspection requirements, and requirements for monitoring quality of specified product installations. C. Provide field testing of installed fiberglass windows by independent laboratory in accordance with AAMA 502 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 during construction process and before installation of interior finishes. 1. Field test for water penetration in accordance with ASTM E1105 using Procedure B - cyclic static air pressure difference; test pressure shall not be less than 1.9 psf. 2. Field test for air leakage in accordance with ASTM E783 with uniform static air pressure difference of 6.27 psf. D. Repair or replace fenestration components that have failed designated field testing, and retest to verify performance complies with specified requirements.
3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.
3.06 CLEANING A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements. B. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces. C. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess glazing sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 08 5413 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for wood and hollow metal doors. B. Hardware for fire-rated doors. C. Thresholds. D. Weatherstripping and gasketing. E. Gate locks.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealants for setting exterior door thresholds. B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2016. C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; 2017. D. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; 2013. E. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2015. F. BHMA A156.16 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2018. G. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; 2016. H. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; 2014. I. BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems Sponsor; 2017. J. BHMA A156.36 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Locks; 2016. K. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017. L. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. M. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2019. N. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. O. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2017. P. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition. Q. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware is installed on.
Georgia Highway Garage DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 1 February 19, 2021 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly show products to be furnished for this project, and includes construction details, material descriptions, finishes, and dimensions and profiles of individual components. C. Shop Drawings - Door Hardware Schedule: Submit detailed listing that includes each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in Contract Documents. 1. Prepared by or under supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Provide complete description for each door listed. 3. Provide manufacturer's and product names, and catalog numbers; include functions, types, styles, sizes and finishes of each item. 4. Include account of abbreviations and symbols used in schedule. D. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards for Fire-Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, for use by Architect and Contractor. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match door hardware schedule.
1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Warranty against defects in material and workmanship for period indicated, from Date of Substantial Completion. 1. Closers: Five years, minimum. 2. Exit Devices: Three years, minimum. 3. Locksets and Cylinders: Three years, minimum. 4. Other Hardware: Two years, minimum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Provide specified door hardware as required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to extent indicated. B. Provide individual items of single type, of same model, and by same manufacturer. C. Provide door hardware products that comply with the following requirements: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. Accessibility: ADA Standards and ICC A117.1. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101.
Georgia Highway Garage DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 2 February 19, 2021 4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80, listed and labeled by qualified testing agency for fire protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 5. Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL (DIR), ITS (DIR), testing firm acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or _____ as suitable for application indicated.
2.02 HINGES A. Manufacturers: 1. McKinney; an Assa Abloy Group company; _____: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.1, Grade 1. 1. Provide hinges on every swinging door. 2. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide ball-bearing hinges at each door with closer. 4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors. 5. Provide following quantity of butt hinges for each door: a. Doors From 60 inches High up to 90 inches High: Three hinges. b. Doors 90 inches High up to 120 inches High: Four hinges.
2.03 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of each lock, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide cylinders from same manufacturer as locking device. 2. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices.
2.04 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS A. Cylindrical Locks (Bored): Comply with BHMA A156.2, Grade 1, 4000 Series. 1. Bored Hole: 2-1/8 inch diameter. 2. Latchbolt Throw: 1/2 inch, minimum. 3. Backset: 2-3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. 4. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each latchset or lockset with strike box and curved lip extending to protect frame in compliance with indicated requirements. a. Finish: To match lock or latch. 5. Provide a lock for each door, unless otherwise indicated that lock is not required. 6. Provide an office lockset for swinging door where hardware set is not indicated. 7. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of each lock, unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 AUXILIARY LOCKS (DEADLOCKS) A. Auxiliary Locks (Deadlocks): Comply with BHMA A156.36, Grade 1. 1. Type: Bored (cylindrical). 2. Backset: 2-3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Bolt Throw: 1/2 inch, with latch made of hardened steel.
2.06 CLOSERS A. Closers: Comply with BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. 1. Type: Surface mounted to door. 2. Provide door closer on each exterior door. 3. Provide door closer on each fire-rated and smoke-rated door. 4. At outswinging exterior doors, mount closer on interior side of door.
Georgia Highway Garage DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 3 February 19, 2021 2.07 PROTECTION PLATES A. Protection Plates: Comply with BHMA A156.6. B. Metal Properties: Aluminum. 1. Metal, Heavy Duty: Thickness 0.062 inch, minimum. C. Edges: Beveled, on four sides unless otherwise indicated. D. Fasteners: Countersunk screw fasteners. E. Provide clear anti-microbial coating that is silver ion-based.
2.08 KICK PLATES A. Kick Plates: Provide along bottom edge of push side of every door with closer, except aluminum storefront and glass entry doors, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Size: 8 inch high by 2 inch less door width (LDW) on push side of door.
2.09 MOP PLATES A. Mop Plates: Provide along bottom edge of push side of doors to provide protection from cleaning liquids and equipment damage to door surface. 1. Size: 6 inch high by 1-1/2 inch less door width (LDW) on pull side and 2 inch LDW on push side of door.
2.10 DOOR HOLDERS A. Door Holders: Comply with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 1. Type: Lever, or kick down stop, with rubber bumper at bottom end. 2. Material: Aluminum.
2.11 FLOOR STOPS A. Floor Stops: Comply with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 and Resilient Material Retention Test as described in this standard. 1. Type: Manual hold-open, with pencil floor stop. 2. Material: Aluminum housing with rubber insert.
2.12 WALL STOPS A. Wall Stops: Comply with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 and Resilient Material Retention Test as described in this standard. 1. Type: Bumper, concave, wall stop. 2. Material: Aluminum housing with rubber insert.
2.13 THRESHOLDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Pemko; an Assa Abloy Group company; _____: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Thresholds: Comply with BHMA A156.21. 1. Provide threshold at interior doors for transition between two different floor types, and over building expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide threshold at each exterior door, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Flat surface. 4. Material: Aluminum. a. Thermally Broken at exterior doors.
Georgia Highway Garage DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 4 February 19, 2021 5. Threshold Surface: Fluted horizontal grooves across full width. 6. Field cut threshold to profile of frame and width of door sill for tight fit. 7. Provide non-corroding fasteners at exterior locations.
2.14 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers: 1. Pemko; an Assa Abloy Group company; _____: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Weatherstripping and Gasketing: Comply with BHMA A156.22. 1. Head and Jamb Type: Adjustable. 2. Door Sweep Type: Encased in retainer. 3. Material: Aluminum, with brush weatherstripping. 4. Provide weatherstripping on each exterior door at head, jambs, and meeting stiles of door pairs, unless otherwise indicated; . 5. Provide door bottom sweep on each exterior door, unless otherwise indicated.
2.15 SILENCERS A. Silencers: Provide at equal locations on door frame to mute sound of door's impact upon closing. 1. Single Door: Provide three on strike jamb of frame. 2. Pair of Doors: Provide two on head of frame, one for each door at latch side. 3. Material: Rubber, gray color.
2.16 FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX A. Manufacturers: 1. Knox Company; Knox-Box Rapid Entry System, _____: www.knoxbox.com/#sle. B. Fire Department Lock Box: 1. Heavy-duty, surface mounted, solid stainless-steel box with hinged door and interior gasket seal; single drill resistant lock with dust covers and tamper alarm. 2. Capacity: Holds 10 keys. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard as required by AHJ.
2.17 FINISHES A. Finishes: Provide door hardware of same finish, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Primary Finish: 630; satin stainless steel, with stainless steel 300 series base material (former US equivalent US32D); BHMA A156.18. 2. Secondary Finish: 626; satin chromium plated over nickel, with brass or bronze base material (former US equivalent US26D); BHMA A156.18. a. Use secondary finish in kitchens, bathrooms, and other spaces containing chrome or stainless steel finished appliances, fittings, and equipment; provide primary finish on one side of door and secondary finish on other side if necessary. 3. Exceptions: a. Where base material metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an equivalent appearance in accordance with BHMA A156.18. b. Hinges for Fire-Rated Doors: Steel base material with painted finish, in compliance with NFPA 80. c. Door Closer Covers and Arms: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors unless otherwise indicated.
Georgia Highway Garage DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 5 February 19, 2021 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive this work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with applicable codes and NFPA 80. C. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. D. Door Hardware Mounting Heights: Distance from finished floor to center line of hardware item. As indicated in following list; unless noted otherwise in Door Hardware Schedule or on drawings. E. Set exterior door thresholds with full-width bead of elastomeric sealant at each point of contact with floor providing a continuous weather seal; anchor thresholds with stainless steel countersunk screws.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.
3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. C. Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete seal.
3.05 CLEANING
3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 6 February 19, 2021 SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulating glass units. B. Glazing units. C. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealants for other than glazing purposes. B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed lites in doors and borrowed lites.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; Current Edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015. C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. D. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2015). E. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. F. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2018. G. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. H. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass; 2015. I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b. J. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2018c. K. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016. L. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. M. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2008. N. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008. O. GANA (LGRM) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; 2009. P. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. Q. IGMA TM-3000 - North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial & Residential Use; 1990 (2016). R. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. S. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2017.
Georgia Highway Garage GLAZING 08 8000 - 1 February 19, 2021 T. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014, with Errata (2017). U. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Systems; 2017. V. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. W. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. X. UL 263 - Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit and Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available colors. D. Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's qualification statement. F. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM), GANA (SM), GANA (LGRM), and IGMA TM-3000 for glazing installation methods. Maintain one copy on site. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, and to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass. 1. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions, and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass.
Georgia Highway Garage GLAZING 08 8000 - 2 February 19, 2021 2. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load. 3. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum. B. Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier. 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. C. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide exterior glazing products with performance properties as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's published data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods: 1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method.
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality - Q3. 2. Kind HS - Heat-Strengthened Type: Complies with ASTM C1048. 3. Kind FT - Fully Tempered Type: Complies with ASTM C1048. 4. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR 1201 criteria for safety glazing used in hazardous locations.
2.03 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated vision glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS. 3. Warm-Edge Spacers: _____. a. Spacer Width: As required for specified insulating glass unit. b. Spacer Height: 0.27 inch. 4. Spacer Color: Black. 5. Edge Seal: a. Color: Black. 6. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed. B. Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed. 1. Applications: Exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space between lites filled with argon. 3. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. b. Coating: Low-E (passive type), on #2 surface. 4. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 5. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 6. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: 0.22, nominal. 7. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): 70 percent, nominal.
Georgia Highway Garage GLAZING 08 8000 - 3 February 19, 2021 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC):.40, nominal. 9. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.
2.04 GLAZING UNITS A. Monolithic Interior Vision Glazing: 1. Applications: Interior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass Type: Annealed float glass. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal. B. Type G-5 - Monolithic Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated. 1. Applications: a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors. b. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions. c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. d. Other locations indicated on drawings. 2. Glass Type: Fully tempered safety glass as specified. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch by height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent, designed for compression of 25 percent to effect an air barrier and vapor retarder seal; ____x____ inch size. C. Glazing Splines: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option II; color black.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system. C. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively. D. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.
Georgia Highway Garage GLAZING 08 8000 - 4 February 19, 2021 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards. B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer. D. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated. E. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing, plastering, mortar droppings, etc.
3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the interior of the building. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
3.06 CLEANING A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements. B. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. C. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. E. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.07 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage GLAZING 08 8000 - 5 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage GLAZING 08 8000 - 6 February 19, 2021 SECTION 09 0561 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section applies to floors identified in Contract Documents that are receiving the following types of floor coverings: 1. Resilient tile and sheet. B. Preparation of new concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings. C. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity (pH). D. Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or alkalinity (pH) conditions. 1. Contractor shall perform all specified remediation of concrete floor slabs. If such remediation is indicated by testing agency's report and is due to a condition not under Contractor's control or could not have been predicted by examination prior to entering into the contract, a contract modification will be issued. E. Patching compound.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Additional requirements relating to testing agencies and testing. B. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Handling of existing floor coverings removed.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2020b. B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 2020. C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2019, with Editorial Revision (2020). D. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2016a.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at least 24 hours prior to testing.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing: 1. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) limits and test methods. 2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure. B. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.
Georgia Highway Garage COMMON WORK RESULTS 09 0561 - 1 February 19, 2021 FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging; include installation instructions. C. Keep materials from freezing.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F. B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics: 1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges. 2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION A. Perform following operations in the order indicated: 1. Preliminary cleaning. 2. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional 1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer. 3. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Alkalinity (pH) tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Specified remediation, if required. 6. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required. 7. Other preparation specified. 8. Adhesive bond and compatibility test. 9. Protection. B. Remediations: 1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction. 2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that
Georgia Highway Garage COMMON WORK RESULTS 09 0561 - 2 February 19, 2021 FOR FLOORING PREPARATION adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating or remedial sheet membrane over entire suspect floor area. 3. Excessive Alkalinity (pH): If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor area.
3.02 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of this section. C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows. D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method, as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently. E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours. F. Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.03 ALKALINITY TESTING A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B. The following procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the Contractor's convenience. 1. Use a wide range alkalinity (pH) test paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water. 2. Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1 inch in diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the alkalinity (pH) test paper into the water, remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine alkalinity (pH) reading. 3. Use of a digital pH meter with probe is acceptable; follow meter manufacturer's instructions. C. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if alkalinity (pH) test value is over 10.
3.04 PREPARATION A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other irregularities with patching compound. D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.
3.05 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage COMMON WORK RESULTS 09 0561 - 3 February 19, 2021 FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Georgia Highway Garage COMMON WORK RESULTS 09 0561 - 4 February 19, 2021 FOR FLOORING PREPARATION SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Gypsum sheathing. C. Gypsum wallboard. D. Joint treatment and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing. C. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation. D. Section 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2017. B. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2018. C. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2018b. D. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2018. E. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2018. F. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2014a. G. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013. H. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017. I. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016. J. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2016. K. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; 2015. L. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. M. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals.
Georgia Highway Garage GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 1 February 19, 2021 2. Calculations for loadings and stresses of specially fabricated framing, signed and sealed by a professional structural engineer. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing, with minimum 5 years of experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. ICC IBC Item Numbers: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC IBC for the particular assembly. 2. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the particular assembly. 3. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL (FRD).
2.02 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. American Gypsum Company; ____: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. 2. CertainTeed Corporation; ____: www.certainteed.com/#sle. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ____: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. 4. USG Corporation; ____: www.usg.com/#sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass mat faced gypsum panels, as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building is enclosed and conditioned. b. Mold resistant board is required within all toilet rooms, and other wet areas as indicated. 4. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Resistance Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 5. Thickness: as indicated on drawings. a. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings.
2.03 Gypsum Wallboard ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100.
Georgia Highway Garage GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 2 February 19, 2021 B. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel, unless noted otherwise. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Products: a. Same manufacturer as framing materials. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. D. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inches in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion-resistant. E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion-resistant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. C. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-resistant sealant.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. D. Moisture Guard Trim: Install on bottom edge of gypsum board according to manufacturer's instructions and in locations indicated on drawings.
3.04 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically indicated. 2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Level 1: Fire-resistance-rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.
Georgia Highway Garage GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 3 February 19, 2021 3.05 TOLERANCES END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal partition, ceiling, and soffit framing. B. Framing accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking within stud framing. B. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation. C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal studs for gypsum board partition framing. D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Execution requirements for anchors for attaching work of this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; 2016, with Supplement (2018). B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2018. C. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2018. D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2018.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data describing framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts, and limitations. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. ClarkDietrich; ______: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. 2. Marino; ____: www.marinoware.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with applicable code and as indicated on drawings.
Georgia Highway Garage NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 09 2216 - 1 February 19, 2021 FRAMING B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: C shaped with knurled or embossed faces. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. C. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws, and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100. 2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot-dipped galvanized coating. D. Deflection and Firestop Track: Intumescent strip factory-applied to track flanges expands when exposed to heat or flames to provide a perimeter joint seal. E. Ceiling Suspension System: 1. Basis of Design: Armstrong Drywall Grid System 2. Main Beam: Shall be double-web construction (minimum 0.0179 inch prior to protective coating, ASTM C645, hot dipped galvanzied per ASTM A653. 3. Primary Cross Tees: Shall be double-web steel construction (minimum 0.0179 inch prior to protective coating, ASTM C645), hot dipped galvanized (minimum G40 or G90 per ASTM A653). 4. Locations: As indicated on drawings. F. Non-Loadbearing Framing Accessories: 1. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. 2. Acoustic Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100.
2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections to sizes and profiles required. B. Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUD FRAMING A. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. B. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches on center. D. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall studs. E. Align stud web openings horizontally. F. Secure studs to tracks using crimping method. Do not weld.
Georgia Highway Garage NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 09 2216 - 2 February 19, 2021 FRAMING G. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs. H. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than 2 inches from each side of openings. I. Brace stud framing system rigid. J. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, and blocking with electrical, mechanical, and other work to be placed within or behind stud framing. K. Blocking: Use wood blocking secured to studs. Provide blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and opening frames. L. Furring: Install at spacing and locations shown on drawings. Lap splices a minimum of 6 inches.
3.03 CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install furring after work above ceiling or soffit is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. B. Install furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work. C. Securely anchor hangers to structural members or embed them in structural slab. Space hangers as required to limit deflection to criteria indicated. Use rigid hangers at exterior soffits. D. Space main carrying channels at maximum 72 inch on center, and not more than 6 inches from wall surfaces. Lap splice securely. E. Securely fix carrying channels to hangers to prevent turning or twisting and to transmit full load to hangers. F. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels, not more than 2 inches from perimeter walls, and rigidly secure. Lap splices securely. G. Reinforce openings in suspension system that interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each opening. H. Laterally brace suspension system. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 09 2216 - 3 February 19, 2021 FRAMING Georgia Highway Garage NON-STRUCTURAL METAL 09 2216 - 4 February 19, 2021 FRAMING SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustical insulation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2017. B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b. D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2019.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning. C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. D. Samples: Submit two samples ___6_by__6__ inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
Georgia Highway Garage ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 5100 - 1 February 19, 2021 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustic Tiles/Panels: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; ____: www.armstrongceilings.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Suspension Systems: 1. Same as for acoustical units.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Acoustical Panels: Mineral fiber with membrane-faced overlay, with the following characteristics: 1. Classification: ASTM E1264 Type IV. 2. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 4. Panel Edge: Square. 5. Tile Edge: Square. 6. Color: White. 7. Suspension System: Exposed grid. 8. Products: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Ultima: www.armstrongceilings.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with perimeter moldings, hold down clips, stabilizer bars, clips, and splices as required. B. Exposed Suspension System: Hot-dipped galvanized steel grid and cap. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty, when tested in accordance with ASTM C635/C635M. 2. Profile: Tee; 9/16 inch face width. 3. Finish: Baked enamel. 4. Color: White. 5. Products: a. Armstrong Suprafine XL 9/16" Exposed Tee. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Hanger Wire: 12 gauge, 0.08 inch galvanized steel wire. C. Perimeter Moldings: Same metal and finish as grid. 1. Size: As required for installation conditions. 2. Angle Molding: L-shaped, for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. 3. Shadow Molding: Shaped to create a perimeter reveal.
Georgia Highway Garage ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 5100 - 2 February 19, 2021 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 Preparation A. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. B. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
3.03 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. B. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. C. Suspension System, Non-Seismic: Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. E. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. F. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. G. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
3.04 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. E. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 5100 - 3 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 5100 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Concrete slab moisture and alkalinity testing and remediation procedures.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2019a, with Editorial Revision (2020). B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2019, with Editorial Revision (2020). C. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile; 2020. D. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2016. E. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2019.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate floor patterns. D. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples and applicable accessories for Architect's initial selection. E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: provide types of flooring and accessories supplied by one manufacturer, including moisture mitigation systems, primers, leveling and patching compounds, and adhesives. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, protected from harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
Georgia Highway Garage RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 1 February 19, 2021 Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the flooring and accessories of 65ºF and a maximum temperature of 85ºF for at least 48 hours before, during, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55ºF in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Tile: LVT. 1. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong Flooring Inc; Natural Creations with Diamond 10 Technology ArborArt: www.armstrong.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700, of Class corresponding to type specified. 3. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 6116. 4. Plank Tile Size: 6 by 48 inch. 5. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.020 inch. 6. Total Thickness: 0.125 inch. 7. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.02 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TV, vinyl, thermoplastic; style as scheduled. 1. Manufacturers: a. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Traditional Vinyl : www.johnsonite.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Height: 4 inch. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 4. Finish: Satin. 5. Length: Roll. 6. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and internal corners.
2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
Georgia Highway Garage RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 2 February 19, 2021 C. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH). 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
3.03 Installation - General A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.04 Installation - Tile Flooring A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install plank tile with a random offset of at least 6 inches from adjacent rows.
3.05 Installation - Resilient Base A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 3 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, zinc, and lead. 6. Floors, unless specifically indicated. 7. Glass. 8. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air Resources Board; 2007. C. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; Current Edition. D. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. E. SCAQMD 1113 - Architectural Coatings; 1977 (Amended 2016). F. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016). G. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 2018. H. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2003).
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system.
Georgia Highway Garage EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113 - 1 February 19, 2021 C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on tempered hardboard, _8___by_8___ inch in size.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior paint and finishes during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paints and finishes from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.
2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Where MPI paint numbers are specified, provide products listed in Master Painters Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI categories, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Comply with Section 01 6116. C. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 2. Allow for minimum of two colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to Owner.
Georgia Highway Garage EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113 - 2 February 19, 2021 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including primed metal. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Top Coat(s): Exterior Alkyd Enamel; MPI #94 or 96. a. Products: 1) Behr Alkyd Interior/Exterior Satin Enamel [No. 7900]. 2) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. E. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.
Georgia Highway Garage EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113 - 3 February 19, 2021 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, and lead items. 6. Floors, unless specifically indicated. 7. Glass. 8. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2016. C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Based Materials; 2020. D. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air Resources Board; 2007. E. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. F. SCAQMD 1113 - Architectural Coatings; 1977 (Amended 2016). G. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016). H. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 2018. I. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.
Georgia Highway Garage INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 1 February 19, 2021 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where directed. 3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Paints: 1. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com/#sle. 2. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
Georgia Highway Garage INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 2 February 19, 2021 C. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Comply with Section 01 6116. C. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, concrete, wood, shop primed steel, and galvanized steel. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Top Coat(s): High Performance Architectural Interior Latex; MPI #138, 139, 140, or 141. 3. Top Coat Sheen: a. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen for ceilings and other overhead surfaces. b. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations. c. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen for items subject to frequent touching by occupants, including door frames and railings. 4. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate. B. Transparent Finish on Concrete Floors. 1. 1 coat stain. 2. Sealer: Water Based Sealer for Concrete Floors; MPI #99. a. Products: 1) Behr Premium Wet-Look Sealer Low-Lustre [No. 986]. (MPI #99) 2) Sherwin-Williams H&C Clarishield Water-Based Wet-Look Concrete Sealer. (MPI #99) 3) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
Georgia Highway Garage INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 3 February 19, 2021 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 4. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Concrete: F. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. G. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. H. Galvanized Surfaces: I. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. 3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated. J. Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer. E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
Georgia Highway Garage INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 4 February 19, 2021 3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 5 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 6 February 19, 2021 SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room and door signs. B. Building identification signs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Exit signs required by code.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition. B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule. 3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. D. Samples: Submit one sample of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment. E. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building. C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.
Georgia Highway Garage SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 1 February 19, 2021 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1 ______, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Character Height: 1 inch. 4. Sign Height: 3 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers indicated on drawings; in addition, provide "window" section for replaceable occupant name. 6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers indicated on drawings; in addition, provide "window" section with sliding "In Use/Vacant" indicator. 7. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those indicated on drawings. 8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the name "UNISEX", room numbers to be determined later, and braille. C. Building Identification Signs: 1. Use individual metal letters. 2. Mount on outside wall in location indicated on drawings.
2.02 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: Clear. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color.
2.03 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color: 1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch.
2.04 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS A. Metal Letters: 1. Metal: Aluminum casting. 2. Letter Height: 24 inches. 3. Text and Typeface:
Georgia Highway Garage SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 2 February 19, 2021 a. Character Font: TBD. 4. Mounting: Concealed screws.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal. B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Protect from damage until Date of Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 3 February 19, 2021 Georgia Highway Garage SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 10 2600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for wall and corner guard anchors. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of supports in stud wall construction. C. Section 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Placement of supports in stud wall construction.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, wall mounting brackets with mounted measurements, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project: 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. E. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions for care and cleaning of each type of product. Include information about both recommended and potentially detrimental cleaning materials and methods.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver wall and door protection items in original, undamaged protective packaging. Label items to designate installation locations. B. Protect work from UV light damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Corner Guards: 1. Inpro; ______: www.inprocorp.com/#sle. 2. Trim-Tex, Inc; ______: www.trim-tex.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PRODUCT TYPES A. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted: 1. Width of Wings: 1 inches. 2. Corner: Square.
Georgia Highway Garage WALL AND DOOR 10 2600 - 1 February 19, 2021 PROTECTION 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Length: One piece.
2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces for adhered items are clean and smooth. 1. Test painted or wall covering surfaces for adhesion in inconspicuous area, as recommended by manufacturer. Follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendations for remedial measures at locations and/or application conditions where adhesion test's results are unsatisfactory.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position to supporting construction. B. Position corner guard 4 inches above finished floor.
3.03 CLEANING A. Clean wall and door protection items of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage WALL AND DOOR 10 2600 - 2 February 19, 2021 PROTECTION SECTION 10 2800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial toilet accessories. B. Commercial shower and bath accessories. C. Utility room accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015a (Reapproved 2019). C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. D. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. E. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2018.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Commercial Toilet, Shower, and Bath Accessories: 1. American Specialties, Inc; _____: www.americanspecialties.com/#sle. 2. Bradley Corporation; _____: www.bradleycorp.com/#sle. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment; www.bobrick.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Provide products of each category type by single manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth.
Georgia Highway Garage TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY 10 2800 - 1 February 19, 2021 ACCESSORIES B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 or TP316. D. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. E. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.
2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted.
2.04 Commercial Toilet Accessories A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, stainless steel. 1. Products: a. Bobrick B4288. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type, stainless steel, surface-mounted, with viewing slots on sides as refill indicator. 1. Capacity: 400 multifold minimum. 2. Products: a. Bobrick B-4262. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Waste Receptacle: Stainless steel, freestanding style. 1. Minimum capacity: 10 gallons. 2. Products: a. Bobrick B-2260. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, surface, with stainless steel cover and horizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gauge refill indicator, tumbler lock. 1. Products: a. Bobrick B-4112. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Mirrors: Frameless, 1/4 inch thick annealed float glass; ASTM C1036. 1. Annealed Float Glass: Silvering, protective and physical characteristics in compliance with ASTM C1503. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. 3. Products: a. Bobrick B-1556. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. F. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, peened surface. 1. Standard Duty Grab Bars: a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force, minimum. b. Dimensions: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, exposed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. c. Finish: Satin. d. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
Georgia Highway Garage TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY 10 2800 - 2 February 19, 2021 ACCESSORIES 2.05 Commercial Shower and Bath Accessories A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness, satin-finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished stainless steel flanges, for concealed mounting. 1. Products: a. Bobrick B-207 x 36. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Shower Curtain: 1. Material: Opaque vinyl, 0.008 inch thick, matte finish, with antibacterial treatment, flameproof and stain-resistant. 2. Size: 42" x 72" inches, hemmed edges. 3. Grommets: HDPE; pierced through top hem on 6 inch centers. 4. Color: White. 5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel spring wire designed for snap closure. 6. Products: a. Bobrick 204-2. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Towel Bar: Stainless steel, 3/4 inch square tubular bar; rectangular brackets, concealed attachment, satin finish. 1. Length: 18 inches. 2. Products: a. Bobrick B-673. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, double-prong, contoured bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish. 1. Products: a. Bobrick B-6727. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.06 Utility Room Accessories A. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel. 1. Holders: Three spring-loaded rubber cam holders. 2. Length: 34 inches. 3. Products: a. Bobrick B-239x34. b. Substitutions: 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. D. See Section 06 1000 for installation of blocking and reinforcing plates in walls.
Georgia Highway Garage TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY 10 2800 - 3 February 19, 2021 ACCESSORIES 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.
3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY 10 2800 - 4 February 19, 2021 ACCESSORIES SECTION 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2017, with Errata (2018).
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features and extinguisher ratings and classifications. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries; Cosmic Extinguisher - Multipurpose Chemical: www.activarcpg.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries; Ambassador Series: www.activarcpg.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gauge. 1. Class: A:B:C type. 2. Size: 10 pound. 3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, Red color.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION 10 4400 - 1 February 19, 2021 SPECIALTIES 4. Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Cabinet Construction: Non-fire rated. 1. Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type. 1. Size to accommodate accessories. 2. Trimless type. C. Door Glazing: Acrylic plastic, clear, 1/8 inch thick, flat shape and set in resilient channel glazing gasket. D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement of anchors. E. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, color as selected. F. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White colored enamel.
2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, galvanized and enamel finished. B. Lettering: “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” decal, or vinyl self-adhering, pre-spaced black lettering in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
3.03 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION 10 4400 - 2 February 19, 2021 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 5113 METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal lockers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on locker construction, sizes and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Lockers: 1. Lyon Workspace Products; Heavy-Duty Ventilated Lockers: www.lyonworkspace.com/#sle.
2.02 METAL LOCKERS A. Lockers: Factory assembled, Single Tier, Ventilated 1. Color: To be selected by Architect. B. Locker Body: Formed and flanged; with steel stiffener ribs; electric spot welded. 1. Body and Shelves: 16 gauge, ___ inch. C. Frames: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body. 1. Door Frame: 16 gauge, 0.0598 inch, minimum. D. Hinges: Heavy duty, 5-knuckle type; two for doors under 42 inches high; three for doors over 42 inches high. E. Coat Hooks: Double Prong and Single Prong. F. Number Plates: Provide rectangular shaped aluminum plates. Form numbers 3/8 inch high of block font style with ADA designation, in contrasting color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. B. Verify bases and embedded anchors are properly sized.
Georgia Highway Garage METAL LOCKERS 10 5113 - 1 February 19, 2021 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place and secure on prepared base. C. Install lockers plumb and square. D. Install fittings if not factory installed. E. Replace components that do not operate smoothly. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage METAL LOCKERS 10 5113 - 2 February 19, 2021 SECTION 12 3200 MANUFACTURED WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured standard casework, with cabinet hardware. B. Countertops.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for sustainably harvested wood. B. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: VOC limitations for adhesives and sealants. C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and nailers for anchoring casework. D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between casework and countertops and adjacent walls, floors, and ceilings. E. Section 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Reinforcements in metal-framed partitions for anchoring casework.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018b. B. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2018c. C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2018). D. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1; 2017, with Errata (2019). E. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2015. F. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; 2016. G. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework types, sizes, and locations, using large scale plans, elevations, and cross sections. Include rough-in and anchors and reinforcements, placement dimensions and tolerances and clearances required. C. Samples for Finish Selection: Fully finished, for color selection. Minimum sample size: 6 inches by 6 inches. D. Samples of Door and Drawer Pulls E. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's recommendations for care and cleaning. F. Finish touch-up kit for each type and color of materials provided.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
Georgia Highway Garage MANUFACTURED WOOD 12 3200 - 1 February 19, 2021 CASEWORK B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect items provided by this section, including finished surfaces and hardware items during handling and installation. For metal surfaces, use polyethylene film or other protective material standard with the manufacturer. B. Acceptance at Site: 1. Do not deliver or install casework until the conditions specified under Part 3, Examination Article of this section have been met. Products delivered to sites that are not enclosed and/or improperly conditioned will not be accepted if warping or damage due to unsatisfactory conditions occurs. C. Storage: 1. Store casework in the area of installation. If necessary, prior to installation, temporarily store in another area, meeting the environmental requirements specified under Part 3, "Site Verification of Conditions" Article of this section.
1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion, at no additional cost to Owner. Defects include, but are not limited to: 1. Ruptured, cracked, or stained finish coating. 2. Discoloration or lack of finish integrity. 3. Cracking or peeling of finish. 4. Delamination of components. 5. Failure of adhesives. 6. Failure of hardware.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Casework: 1. Wood-Metal Industries; Wood Casework: www.wood-metal.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 CASEWORK, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Wood Veneer Faced Cabinets: Custom Grade. C. Red oak shall be considered the standard wood species.
2.03 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble casework items for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Construction: As required for selected grade. C. Fittings and Fixture Locations: Cut and drill components for fittings and fixtures. D. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length.
Georgia Highway Garage MANUFACTURED WOOD 12 3200 - 2 February 19, 2021 CASEWORK 2.04 WOOD-VENEER-FACED CASEWORK A. Wood-Veneer-Faced Casework: Solid wood and wood panel construction; each unit self-contained and not dependent on adjacent units or building structure for rigidity; in sizes necessary to avoid field cutting except for scribes and filler panels. Include adjustable levelers for base cabinets. 1. Style: Flush overlay. Ease doors and drawer fronts slightly at edges. 2. Cabinet Nominal Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, provide cabinets of widths and heights indicated on drawings, and with following front-to-back dimensions: 3. Finishes: a. Exposed Exterior Surfaces: HPVA HP-1 Grade A, Red Oak, plain sliced, random-matched. b. Exposed Interior Surfaces: HPVA HP-1 Grade B, Ash, plain sliced, random-matched. c. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: HPVA HP-1 Grade B, Ash, plain sliced, random-matched. d. Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option. e. Matching Wood Grain Pattern: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified grade and as follows: 1) Provide balance matched panels at each elevation. f. Factory-finish all exposed and semi-exposed surfaces with the same finish. 1) Preparation: Wood sanded smooth, free from dust and mill marks. 2) Coating: Clear, superior-quality, chemical-resistant acyclic urethane; applied in accordance with manufacturer instructions, force-dried, sanded and wiped clean. 3) Coats: Multiple coats as required to achieve minimum 1.5 mil dry film thickness. 4) Appearance: Clear satin gloss; not cloudy or muddy.
2.05 COUNTERTOPS A. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 11 - Countertops, Custom Grade, unless otherwise noted. B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate. 1. Manufacturer's standard configuration for exposed edges, back and end splashes.
2.06 CABINET HARDWARE A. Manufacturer's standard types, styles and finishes. 1. Pulls: Satin aluminum bent wire style with 4” centers. 2. Slides: Single extension, bottom mounted, epoxy powder coated with positive in stop, out stop, and out keeper, lift-out disconnect, stay closed design. 3. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Twin-pin design with anti-tip up shelf restraints, with load rating of 300lb per shelf support.
2.07 MATERIALS A. Wood-Based Materials: 1. Solid Wood: Air-dried to 4.5 percent moisture content, then tempered to 6 percent moisture content before use. B. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, plain sawn, selected for well-matched species, grain and color, no defects. C. Concealed Solid Wood or Plywood: Any species and without defects affecting strength or utility.
Georgia Highway Garage MANUFACTURED WOOD 12 3200 - 3 February 19, 2021 CASEWORK PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION A. Large Components: Ensure that large components can be moved into final position without damage to other construction.
3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not deliver casework until the following conditions have been met: a. Building has been enclosed (windows and doors sealed and weather-tight). b. An operational HVAC system that maintains temperature and humidity at occupancy levels has been put in place. c. Ceiling, overhead ductwork, piping, and lighting have been installed. d. Installation areas do not require further “wet work” construction. B. Verify adequacy of support framing and anchors. C. Verify that service connections are correctly located and of proper characteristics.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered. Use concealed fasteners to the greatest degree possible. Use exposed fasteners only where allowed by approved shop drawings, or where concealed fasteners are impracticable. C. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure. D. Align cabinets to adjoining components, install filler and/or scribe panels where necessary to close gaps. E. Fasten together cabinets in continuous runs, with joints flush, uniform and tight. Misalignment of adjacent units not to exceed 1/16 inch. In addition, do not exceed the following tolerances: 1. Variation of Tops of Base Cabinets from Level: 1/16 inch in 10 feet. 2. Variation of Faces of Cabinets from a True Plane: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3. Variation of Adjacent Surfaces from a True Plane (Lippage): 1/32 inch. 4. Variation in Alignment of Adjacent Door and Drawer Edges: 1/16 inch. F. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to service space framing and/or wall substrates, with fasteners spaced not more than 16 inches on center. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. G. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. H. Countertops: Install countertops intended and furnished for field installation in one true plane, with ends abutting at hairline joints, and no raised edges. I. Replace units that are damaged, including those that have damaged finishes.
3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating parts, including doors, drawers, hardware, and fixtures to function smoothly.
3.05 CLEANING A. Clean casework and other installed surfaces thoroughly.
3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.
Georgia Highway Garage MANUFACTURED WOOD 12 3200 - 4 February 19, 2021 CASEWORK B. Protect casework and countertops from ongoing construction activities. Prevent workmen from standing on, or storing tools and materials on casework or countertops. C. Repair damage, including to finishes, that occurs prior to Date of Substantial Completion, using methods prescribed by manufacturer; replace units that cannot be repaired to like-new condition. END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage MANUFACTURED WOOD 12 3200 - 5 February 19, 2021 CASEWORK Georgia Highway Garage MANUFACTURED WOOD 12 3200 - 6 February 19, 2021 CASEWORK SECTION 21 0000 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This is a performance specification for a Delegated Design of the sprinkler system associated with this project. The actual sprinkler system design and coordination shall be the responsibility of the Design-Build Fire Protection Contractor. DESCRIPTION IS FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY.
B. This Section specifies automatic sprinkler systems for buildings and structures. Materials and equipment specified in this Section include: 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, sprinkler heads and specialties.
C. Fees & Permits: The contractor shall submit plans to the local authorities (state and local) for review and pay for all fees associated with the review.
D. Sprinklers, fire hoses and cabinets, combination fire hose and extinguishing cabinets, and accessories.
E. Products furnished but not installed include sprinkler head cabinet with spare sprinkler heads. Furnish to the Owner's maintenance personnel.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).
B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standards 13.
C. Working Plans as used in this Section means those documents (including drawings and calculations) prepared pursuant to the requirements contained in NFPA 13 for obtaining approval of the authority having jurisdiction.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The new building shall be protected by a commercial sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13. Sprinkler system is planned for a wet type sprinkler system.
B. Building is fed from a well on site and will require a fire pump, primer pump, storage tank and controls. System to be designed per NFPA 20 and other applicable codes. Fire pump to be to an electric type.
C. Contractor to coordinate size of underground storage tank with site contractor. Civil plans show location of tank and estimated size. Towns plan is to utilize fire department to keep tank filled.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 21 0000-1 February 19, 2021 D. Contractor shall provide any additional pumps required to prime main fire pump. Coordinate electrical requirements with electrical contractor.
E. Contractor to coordinate fire pump room layout with mechanical, plumbing and electrical contractors before any work is commenced in that area.
F. Submit shop drawings, product data sheets and hydraulic calculations for review prior to any installation. Water supply will be based on a new hydrant flow test coordinated by the sprinkler contractor. Sprinkler contractor will be responsible for surveying existing sprinkler system prior to bidding and for submitting complete and correct shop drawings.
G. Hydraulic calculations shall include a backflow preventer. The hydraulic calculation shall provide a 10 psi or 10% pressure margin, whichever is less.
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to size the sprinkler system pipes in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13.
B. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to design the system so that no interferences exist between the fire protection system and work of other trades, equipment and systems designed and installed by others. The latest issues of all architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings will be furnished for reference to assist the Contractor in preparing the design to avoid interference.
C. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to apply for and pay for all permitting and inspections required for the fire protection installation.
1.06 CONFLICTING REQUIREMNETS
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for equipment, material and methods used on this project.
B. Prepare shop drawings showing layout of fire protection system. Use minimum scale of 1/8”=1’- 0” for floor plans. Drawings shall reckon with all building components and show routing of piping to clear same. Drawings shall be accurately dimensioned to show proposed location of all fire protection system components.
C. Stamped drawings shall be submitted to the regulatory agencies having jurisdiction for their approvals. After approvals are obtained, the drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
D. Submit a complete schedule of the material and equipment proposed for this installation to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Include catalog cuts, diagrams, drawings, and such other descriptive data as may be required to clearly show what is intended to be installed and how. In
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 21 0000-2 February 19, 2021 the event, any items of material or equipment contained in the schedule fail to comply with the specifications, such items may be rejected.
E. Maintenance Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, fire department connection, hose and rack, and hose cabinet specified, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and Division-15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."
F. Welders' qualification certificates.
G. Installer qualifications (refer to Quality Assurance).
H. Test Reports and Certificates include "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Underground Piping" as described in NFPA 13.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sprinkler contractor Qualifications: Installation and alterations of fire protection piping, equipment, specialties, and accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified sprinkler contractor. The term “qualified” is defined as being experienced in such work (experienced being a minimum of five years of experience similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with all precautions required, and has successfully completed the necessary examinations and courses required by the authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Division-1 Section: "Definitions and Standards" for definitions for "Installers."
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes: 1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. UL Compliance: Fire protection system materials and components shall be Underwriter's Laboratories listed and labeled. 3. Owner’s insurance company: Fire protection system materials and components shall be approved for the application anticipated. 4. Project designer must be level 3 NICET (National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies) certified or a registered Fire Protection Engineer.
1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule rough-in installations with installations of other building components.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner valve wrenches for each type of sprinkler head installed, quantity as required by NFPA 13.
B. Sprinkler Heads and Cabinets: Furnish extra sprinkler heads of each style included in the project. Furnish each style with its own sprinkler head cabinet and special wrenches as required by NFPA 13.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 21 0000-3 February 19, 2021 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from one of the following: 1. Gate Valves: a. Fairbanks b. Jenkins c. Kennedy Valve, Div of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc. d. Stockham 2. Swing Check Valves: a. Fairbanks b. Jenkins c. Kennedy Valve, Div of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc. d. Stockham 3. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: a. Stockham b. Victaulic Company of America 4. Water Flow Indicators: a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Star Sprinkler Corp. c. Victaulic Company of America d. Viking Corp. 5. Alarm Check Valve: a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Star Sprinkler Corp. d. Viking Corp. 6. Sprinkler Heads: a. Automatic Sprinkler Corp of America. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. d. Grinnell Corporation (A Tyco Company) e. Guardian Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. g. Star Sprinkler Corp. h. Viking Corp.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 21 0000-4 February 19, 2021 2.02 PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS
A. Pipe & Fitting Schedule: The following schedule indicates the pipe and fittings to be used on this project, except where specific requirements are listed elsewhere in this section:
ITEM SIZE ASTM SPEC NO. MATERIAL WEIGHT & TYPE £2" A53, grade B, type S or E Schedule 10, or 40, ANSI B36.10 Pipe >2" A53, grade B, type S or E Schedule 10, ANSI B36.10
£2" A126, class B cast iron Standard, threaded, B16.4 Fittings All Sizes A536, ductile Iron synthetic rubber gaskets class 150, RF, threaded, ANSI £2" A105, forged carbon steel B16.5 Flanges class 150, RF, weld neck or slip on, >2" A105, forged carbon steel ANSI B16.5 Hex head (ANSI B18.2.1), B1.1, Bolts A193, grade B7 carbon steel class 2A course thread A194, Grade 2H, Carbon Heavy hex (ANSI B18.2.2), Nuts steel B1.1,class 2B course thread Per flange A304, stainless steel, Grafoil class 150, RF, ring style, ANSI Gaskets standard filled, spiral wound B16.20
B. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll-grooved pipe and fittings. Grooved mechanical couplings including gaskets used on dry-pipe systems shall be listed for dry-pipe service. All dry pipe system piping shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe.
2.03 GENERAL DUTY VALVES
A. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water working pressure - non-shock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, screw-in bonnet, and malleable iron hand-wheel. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.
B. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: iron body; bronze mounted, 175 pound cold water working pressure - non-shock. Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw and yoke, rising stem; flanged bonnet, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; replaceable bronze wedge facing rings; flanged ends; and a packing assembly consisting of a cast iron gland flange, brass gland, packing, bonnet, and bronze bonnet bushing. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.
C. Butterfly Valves: Class 300, ductile iron body and disk conforming to ASTM A-536, EPDM coated disk, hand wheel for slow acting applications, lever for quick acting applications.
D. Swing Check Valves: MSS SP-71; Class 175, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 21 0000-5 February 19, 2021 2.04 SPECIALTY VALVES AND MANIFOLDS
A. Flow Switch Riser Manifold: Factory assembled unit consisting of flow switch, pressure gauge, sight glass on test & drain connection, and relief valve where required for grid systems. Assembly shall be U. L. tested and listed, and painted red with white identification markings indicating flow direction and tapping uses.
B. Dry-Pipe Valves: Differential type, 175 psig working pressure, and have cast iron, inlet and outlet to suit project piping system, bronze seat with "O" ring seals, single hinge pin and latch design. Provide trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill line attachment.
C. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device, Dry-Pipe System: An automatic device to maintain the correct air pressure in a dry-pipe system or deluge system. System shall have shut-off valves to permit servicing without shutting down the sprinkler system, bypass valve for quick system filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure, strainer; pressure ratings 14 to 60 psig adjustable range, and 175 psig maximum inlet pressure. Electrical ratings shall match compressor ratings.
2.05 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinkler Heads: Glass bulb or fusible link type, and style as indicated or required by the application. Unless otherwise indicated, provide heads with nominal ½” discharge orifice, for "Ordinary" temperature range.
B. Sprinkler Head Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes: 1. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Styles: Painted white in finish spaces, exposed to view; rough bronze finish for heads in unfinished spaces and not exposed to view. Heads shall be wax-coated where installed exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes. 2. Concealed Style: Rough brass, with painted white cover plate.
3. Recessed Style: Painted white, with painted white escutcheon plate. 4. Residential Style: Painted white.
C. Sprinkler Head Cabinet and Wrench: finished steel cabinet, suitable for wall mounting, with hinged cover and space for 6 spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrench. Provide a separate cabinet for each style sprinkler head on the project.
2.06 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
A. Provide identification signs at all control, drain, test and alarm valves as required. Signs shall be of the type, size and location as required by NFPA.
2.07 ALARM DEVICES
A. General: Types and sizes shall mate and match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water Flow Indicators: vane type waterflow detector, rated to 250 psig; designed for horizontal or vertical installation; have 2-SPDT circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere 125 volts AC and 0.25 ampere 24 Volts DC; complete with factory-set,
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 21 0000-6 February 19, 2021 field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals, and tamper-proof cover which sends a signal when cover is removed.
C. Supervisory Switches: SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in other than full open position.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Entire installation shall be in accordance with approved shop drawings. When unforeseen job site conditions will not permit piping to be installed as shown on the drawings, necessary changes will be made to accomplish a coordinated system without additional cost to the Owner, even though pipe may have been delivered to the site cut to predetermined lengths.
B. Provide gate valves of size and at locations shown on the drawings and any additional valves that might be required by local authorities as required. Locate all valves where readily accessible. Provide chain wheel operators or permanent ladders for all valves not accessible from the floor. All main line valves shall be electrically monitored or secured with a chain and padlock which will lock the valve in an open position.
C. Provide check valves of size and at location as required by code and any additional check valves that might be required by local authorities.
D. Provide valved test drains as required by NFPA. Pipe test drains to spill on grade whenever possible or to nearest floor drain.
E. Make provisions to drain all parts of the piping system.
3.03 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Install systems using schedule 40 threaded or welded, schedule 10 grooved, or combination thereof as allowed by NFPA 13.
3.04 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
B. Deviations from approved "Working Plans" for sprinkler piping, require written approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Architect prior to deviating for the approved "Working Plans."
C. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
D. Install adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having dissimilar connections.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 21 0000-7 February 19, 2021 E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions, for rigid systems. Provide protection from damage where subject to earthquake in accordance with NFPA 13.
F. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13, complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.
G. Install pressure gage on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gage with a connection not less than 1/4 inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and where they will not be subject to freezing.
3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Specification section, “BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS”.
3.06 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13, and the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Control Valves: Install supervised-open control valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. Refer to Division-15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and signs.
C. Install check valves in each water supply connection.
D. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install in the vertical position, in proper direction of flow, in the main supply to the dry-pipe system. Install the basic trim set, priming chamber attachment and fill line attachment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. During hydrostatic test of system piping at pressures in excess of 50 psi, position the clapper in latched wide open position or removed from valve, to prevent injury to the valve. Test valve for proper operation.
3.07 SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATIONS
A. Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures specified, and retest repaired portion of the system.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 21 0000-8 February 19, 2021 SECTION 22 0000 PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of all plumbing waste and vent, sanitary building drain lines and water lines, domestic hot and cold-water piping, waste lines, vents, and stacks, cleanouts and traps, and floor drains, access panels, and pipe insula- tion within the building envelope as reflected in the Performance Specification and as required. B. Related work specified elsewhere includes:
Site Work Division 31 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 0500 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 23 2113 Piping Specialties 23 2116 Pipe Hangers and Supports 23 0529 Mechanical Insulation 23 0700 Electrical Division 16 C. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, tools, hardware and accessories and perform all work necessary for the complete execution of the plumbing work as reflected in the on the drawings and these specifications. Work not specifically shown or specified yet required to ensure proper and complete operation of all systems. The Work shall comply with all applicable codes, regulations, ordinances and Utility Companies' requirements. D. All plumbing fixtures and components that convey potable water shall comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 61, Annex G. E. This Contractor shall secure and pay for all required fees, permits, and inspections for the work included in this Section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Plumbing work shall be performed by a duly licensed plumber who is qualified to do such work and who is normally engaged in this type of work. He shall be familiar with the materials being installed, with all pertinent standards, codes, regulations and ordinances, the manufacturers' recommended installation procedures, the requirements of the Utility Companies, and the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Plumbing materials, products, equipment, construction and installations shall comply with State and local plumbing codes, ANSI standards, and the requirements of the Utility Companies. Wherever a conflict may exist between these Contract Documents or any of the codes or Utilities' requirements, the more stringent shall govern.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0000. B. Submit one electronic copy of all submittal data and/or complete shop drawings as specified in each section for review. C. See Section 01 3000, for Administrative Requirements. D. Mechanical/Plumbing contractor shall provide a list of Submittals for Engineers review prior to submitting on submittals. E. Submittals shall be complete by specification article. All items specified under the same article as the major item shall be included in the submittals. No partial or incomplete submittal will be
Georgia Highway Garage PLUMBING 22 0000-1 February 19, 2021 accepted or reviewed. Submittals for equipment requiring electrical service shall include wiring diagrams. F. Provide copies of all required permits. G. Provide as-built plumbing drawings. H. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment. I. Submittals and/or shop drawings are to be edited to show specific data for the mechanical equipment that the contractor intends to provide. J. Submittals and/or shop drawings are to be identified with numbers and letters identical to those listed on the drawings and/or specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome-plated, satin finish, cast brass escutcheons for exposed piping passing through or protruding from walls, ceilings, and floors. B. On bare pipes, affix escutcheons with set screw; on insulated pipes by spring tension, and on projections of fittings, provide special deep type escutcheons.
2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings, at the base of every vertical waste and soil stack, at each change of direction greater than 45°, at 50-foot maximum intervals in horizontal drainage lines of 4" size and smaller, at 100-foot maximum intervals for larger pipe, and as otherwise required by code. B. Floor cleanouts shall be Zurn ZN-1400 and shall terminate flush with floor. C. Cover plates shall be provided on all cleanout plugs in finished areas. Cover plates shall be Zurn ZANB-1460-9 with nickel bronze finish.
2.03 TRAPS A. Drains and Sanitary - PVC, self-cleaning "P" type unless otherwise indicated. B. Traps for ADA compliant wall hung lavatory sinks are to be insulated. See Section 230516.
2.04 FIXTURE FITTINGS A. Provide chromium plated wall supplies including wall flange, connecting piping and angle stop with handle. Supplies and stops to be McGuire Mfg. Co.
2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Furnish and install as indicated or where required by Code, a reduced pressure backflow preventer. Manufacturer shall be Watts Model 007 or approved equal. 2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Furnish and install on all quick closing valves such as washing machines, dishwashers and flush valve toilets.
2.07 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install as indicated in the Performance Specifications. B. Plumbing Fixtures shall be provided as noted in the Mechanical Performance Specification. C. Wall carriers shall be provided for all wall mounted lavatories.
2.08 VACUUM BREAKERS
Georgia Highway Garage PLUMBING 22 0000-2 February 19, 2021 A. All equipment having hose or tubing connections shall be provided with approved vacuum breakers.
2.09 OTHER MATERIALS A. Refer to other applicable Sections. B. All other materials, not specifically shown or described, but required for a complete, proper and operational plumbing system, shall be as selected by Contractor and subject to the acceptance by Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verify that plumbing work may be installed in strict accordance with pertinent codes, regulations, ordinances, and Utility Companies' requirements. C. The scale of the Drawings precludes indicating all offsets, fittings, accessories and details which may be required. Carefully examine the Drawings and the work of other trades for conditions which may affect the installation of the plumbing. Re-arrange the plumbing work, as required, and provide all items required to meet such conditions to complete the systems. D. Lay out the plumbing systems and determine proper elevations for all components. Run pipelines in long straight lines and use the minimum number of bends possible. Do not run piping in areas exclusively containing telephone or electrical equipment. In other areas, do not run piping within 5' laterally of electrical equipment, such as motor control centers, switchgear, electrical motors, transformers, terminal strips and the like. Where this is not possible, provide drip pans. Do not penetrate structural members. E. Except where exposed pipe is specified, lay out plumbing so that piping is carried in partitions, chases or recesses where provided, floor openings, and above ceilings. F. Whenever possible, separate hot and cold-water lines by at least 6" and never allow them to touch one another.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. General - Install piping promptly, capping or plugging open ends and making pipe generally free from traps and in a manner to conserve space for other work. Run pipes straight and parallel or at right angles to walls with risers erected plumb and true. B. Horizontal Location - Install piping within walls where possible, otherwise, as close to walls, columns and the like as is possible, providing offsets, cleanouts, fittings, and other materials re- quired. C. Fittings - Use reducing fittings for changes in pipe size. D. Drain Valves - Pitch piping to low points. Where low points or pockets occur because of changes in elevation required by structural or other interferences, provide a drain valve. E. Vacuum Breakers - Provide vacuum breakers on service sinks, hose bibs, and where otherwise indicated or required. F. Insulation - Provide pipe insulation on exposed and concealed hot and cold water lines in accordance with Section 23 0700. G. Expansion Loops - Provide expansion loops on hot water lines, as required. Connect fixture branches to risers in a manner to allow for expansion of riser without springing the branch piping.
Georgia Highway Garage PLUMBING 22 0000-3 February 19, 2021 H. Cushions - Cushion traps and bearings to minimize transfer of sound, firmly anchor pipes in position, provide complete isolation of dissimilar metals, and provide air chambers at fixtures with each chamber at least 24" long and one size larger than the branch. 3.03 CLOSING IN WORK A. Do not cover up or enclose work until it has been tested and inspected.
3.04 TESTING A. Test all pipelines in accordance with the requirements of all local and state plumbing codes. B. Test underground piping prior to backfilling. C. Insure that the test pressure which might damage fixtures or equipment does not reach such units by valving them off or otherwise isolating them during the test. D. All hydrostatic tests shall be held for a minimum of eight hours without loss of pressure. All air tests shall be held for a minimum of one hour without loss of pressure. E. Test Procedure shall be as follows: 1. Drainage systems (including sanitary sewers, storm sewers, and sanitary vents): All low points of such systems shall be plugged and filled with water to uppermost outlet. System shall stand full of water for 24 hours with no indication of leaks. 2. Domestic hot and cold water: 150 psig hydrostatic test. 3. Gas: 30 psig air test. F. Test piping prior to application of paint or insulation. G. Separately test portions of piping that will be concealed before completion.
3.05 DISINFECTION A. Disinfect all pipes installed to carry potable water. B. Disinfect the systems, first being sure that trapped air is expelled, the system is full of water, and all loose material or debris has been washed out. C. Use a dosage which will produce not less than 50 ppm available chlorine throughout the entire system and not less than 10 ppm chlorine residual after a contact period of not less than 24 hours. Repeat disinfection if chlorine residual is less than 10 ppm after 24 hours contact period. D. During the disinfection period, exercise care to prevent harm to humans, animals, property or the environment, and to prevent contamination of water in the city water mains. E. After the disinfection period, flush the piping with clean potable water until the chlorine residual does not exceed 0.2 ppm.
3.06 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Make any adjustments which may be required to make systems perform as required. Set controls and prepare system for permanent operation. B. Thoroughly clean all work and remove labels, stamps, dirt, pipe jointing materials and the like to place the systems in a neat, clean and sanitary condition. Use only manufacturer recommended cleaning solutions on fixtures so as not to damage the finish.
3.07 FLOOR DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Set floor drains so that top will be slightly lower than surrounding floor. B. Flash all drains located in slabs above ground as required extending 24" on all sides.
3.08 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
Georgia Highway Garage PLUMBING 22 0000-4 February 19, 2021 A. Provide cleanouts full size for pipe up to 4" at base of all vertical stacks, ends of sewer mains, changes in direction of sewer mains, and in horizontal runs of piping not over 50' apart for interior sewers, and not over 100' apart for exterior sewers. Install cleanouts so they are accessible by extending them through walls or floors. B. For exterior cleanouts, extend cast iron inspection pipe up to exterior cleanout poured in place in 24" x 24" x 8" concrete block set flush with finished grade.
3.09 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Set fixtures level with solid backing behind lavatory supports. Wall supports to be Zurn or equal. B. Provide chrome-plated anchor bolts and washers for all lavatories and china bolt caps for all floor-mounted water closets. C. Remove all labels, clean fixtures, and leave installation ready for use. D. Connections to individual fixtures shall not be less than sizes scheduled on the drawings unless otherwise specifically noted. E. Seal all cracks between fixture and wall, and/or counter top, and/or floor with matching color sealant equal to General Electric silicone. F. No slip joints are allowed at the tub waste assembly connection to the sanitary waste system.
3.10 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION A. Locate valve where it will be visible and accessible for maintenance and at such location that dripping or discharge of water from relief vent will not create a nuisance nor damage to finished surfaces. BFP to be Watts 007 or equal. B. Install shut-off valve and strainer upstream of backflow preventer.
3.11 HOSE BIBB INSTALLATION A. Locate wall hydrants such that valve seat is exposed in warm space or warm intersecting wall. B. Do not try to conceal wall hydrant in exterior wall. END OF SECTION 22 0000
Georgia Highway Garage PLUMBING 22 0000-5 February 19, 2021 SECTION 23 0000 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The specifications included in the bid package, as prepared by Pearson & Associates, Inc., are intended as a “Performance Specification Guideline”. These specifications are not intended to show all required work. They are intended to show the desired end product. It is the bidding contractor’s responsibility to install all required labor, piping, ductwork and equipment required for a complete operating system as described herein. This project will require “design-build” expertise by the bidding contractors. B. The “Scope of Work” describes the required mechanical and plumbing work that is needed. C. This section covers general provisions that are applicable to all mechanical and plumbing work and the testing of the completed mechanical and plumbing systems. The requirements of other Sections shall take precedence over the requirements of this Section. D. Division 23 covers, in broad detail, the extent of the mechanical work and the equipment to be provided and shall not be construed as a complete description of all the details of design and construction requirements. E. The contractor shall review all architectural, civil, landscape, structural, mechanical, plumbing, lighting, and all other drawings made available to all other contractors of all disciplines to fully understand the extent of all work required. F. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and transportation as required to completely install the HVAC and Plumbing Systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Division. G. Drawings: 1. The contractor shall submit stamped drawings to the State of Vermont Division of Fire Safety for review and permitting. 2. Reasonable changes required by job conditions (including offsetting of piping and ductwork, etc.) shall be made at no additional cost to the owner. 3. Locations of equipment are to be as: a. Shown on Architectural Drawings; b. Directed in the field; c. Required for proper connection of equipment to be served; d. Required for proper symmetry in the space involved; H. With deviations made only with the specific written approval of Architect and/or Owner’s representative. Definitions: 1. "Provide" shall have the same meaning as "furnish and install." All material so implied either on the drawings or in these specifications shall be furnished and installed unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Contractor Abbreviations: a. MC Mechanical Contractor b. EC Electrical Contractor c. PC Plumbing Contractor d. GC General Contractor I. Contractor shall be responsible to insure a complete system and compliance with all applicable codes. In the absence of a clarification by the Engineer, the contractor must install his work in accordance with the more stringent application. Contractor assumes full responsibility for any and all items furnished and installed without the written approval by the Architect. Under no
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0000-1 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS circumstances will a change order be approved for work installed that was not approved by the Architect. J. Related work specified elsewhere includes: Instructions to Bidders 1. General Requirements Division 01 2. Sitework Division 31 3. Concrete Division 03 4. Finishes Division 09 5. Electrical Division 26 6. Automatic control valves, separable wells for immersion elements, louvers and dampers furnished by others shall be installed by the Mechanical Contractor.
1.02 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. The HVAC work shall include the installation of all motors, temperature controls, limit switches, etc., as herein specified. All 240, 208, and 120 volt "power" wiring and connections, not specified in this Section, will be provided under Division 26 - Electrical. B. All wiring, motor starters and auxiliary devices required for the specified systems, equipment and operations indicated in this Section shall be provided under this Section, unless specifically indicated on the Drawings related to Division 26 - Electrical. This shall include, but is not neces- sarily limited to, all wiring for automatic temperature control and all wiring for automatic timing controls. C. The materials and methods for all electrical work provided under this Section shall comply with the requirements specified under Division 26 - Electrical. Coordinate equipment ratings, starter sizes, protective device sizes, wire and conduit sizes, holding coil voltages and control voltages with Division 26. D. All motors are to be NEMA Premium Efficient where available.
1.03 SUBMITTAL DATA AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit one electronic copy of all submittal data and/or complete shop drawings as specified in each section for review. B. See Division 01, for Administrative Provisions. C. Mechanical/Plumbing contractor shall provide a list of Submittals for Engineers review prior to submitting on submittals. D. Submittals shall be complete by specification article. All items specified under the same article as the major item shall be included in the submittals. No partial or incomplete submittal will be accepted or reviewed. Submittals for equipment requiring electrical service shall include wiring diagrams. E. Provide copies of all required permits. F. Provide air and water balance reports. G. Provide as-built mechanical drawings. H. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment. I. Submittals and/or shop drawings are to be edited to show specific data for the mechanical equipment that the contractor intends to provide. J. Submittals and/or shop drawings are to be identified with numbers and letters identical to those listed on the drawings and/or specifications.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0000-2 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS 1.04 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During progress of the work, the contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all changes made in the mechanical system installation from the layout and materials shown. These shall be kept on a separate set of plans. At the completion of the project, transfer all information to the architect/engineer in electronic form.
1.05 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Upon completion of this portion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect/Owner three copies of a manual describing the system. Prepare manuals in durable plastic binders approximately 8½ by 11 inches in size with at least the following: 1. Identification on, or readable through, the front cover stating general nature of the manual. 2. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual, furnishing immediate information as to location in the manual of all data regarding the installation. 3. A copy of all reviewed submittals and shop drawings. 4. A simplified description of the operation of all systems including the function of each piece of equipment within each system. These descriptions shall be supported with a schematic flow diagram. 5. As-built controls, including wiring diagrams and sequences of operations, and post commissioning as-builts as required. 6. Valve tag charts. 7. An explanation of the control sequence of each system along with the following instructions wherever applicable. a. Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment. b. Normal starting, operation and shutdown. c. Summer or winter shutdown. 8. An outline of a preventive maintenance program for each system which shall include a schedule of inspection and maintenance. It shall suggest the maintenance and inspection that should be done with outside service. 9. Complete name and address of nearest vendor of replaceable parts. 10. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 11. Where contents of manual include manufacturer's catalog pages, clearly indicate the precise items included in this installation and delete, or otherwise clearly indicate, all manufacturer's data with which this installation is not concerned. 12. Letter of Guarantee from Contractor.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the care and protection of all materials and mechanical work until the project is accepted by the Owner. B. Immediately remove from the construction site all materials damaged and/or destroyed and replace with new materials to the complete satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer without additional cost to the Owner.
1.07 SUBSTITUTION FOR SPECIFIED MATERIALS: A. Where a specific trade name, manufacturer and model number is mentioned, it is intended to establish the quality, style and type of equipment necessary to fulfill design criteria and shall not be construed as restricting or limiting competition among manufacturers. B. The specific name and model number scheduled on the drawings and/or the first name in the specification is the basis of the system design.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0000-3 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS C. Contractor may propose substitutes. 1. Any material or equipment other than that designated as system design shall be considered a substitute whether referenced as an equal or not. 2. All submittals for substitution shall be in the form of a fully coordinated proposal covering all changes in the work associated with making the substitution. 3. The change shall include the mechanical and all other disciplines associated with the change. 4. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for procedures to propose substitutes. 5. Contractors shall be held responsible for all physical changes resulting from such substitutions of equipment and shall bear any and all increased costs to himself as well as to other trades in making said substitutions. Approval by the Architect/Engineer of equipment other than the specified does not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility. 6. In all instances, contractors shall assume full responsibility for proof of quality of the substitute to the equipment hereinafter specified. All data and information necessary for proof of equality, function and space requirements shall be prepared and accompany the submittal of the substitution to the Architect. D. In the event the substitute material or equipment does not perform, fit or meet quality standards, the Contractor shall provide the specified material or equipment and bear all costs to replace the substituted item with the specified.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work specified in Division 23 shall be performed by approved workmen qualified by satisfactory experience in the particular work. B. Mechanical equipment, piping, etc… shall be designed to ANSI, ASME, NEMA, OSHA, IEEE, AGMA and other applicable standards.
1.09 LAWS, PERMITS, INSPECTION, TAP FEES A. Comply with all Federal, State, Municipal, OSHA, NFPA, AGA, NEC, and Utility Companies' laws, ordinances and regulations that apply to the work. B. Obtain all required permits and inspections. Pay all fees and costs. C. Before requesting final payment, submit certificates of approval (or final inspection) from the concerned above authorities.
1.10 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor will guarantee all materials, workmanship and the successful operation of all equipment and apparatus installed for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. B. The Contractor will guarantee to repair or replace at his own expense any work or material installed or furnished under this contract which develops defects, except for normal wear, within one year from the date of final acceptance of the entire work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL A. Provide and install only new materials and equipment of the latest design of the respective manufacturers. B. All materials and equipment of the same classification shall be the product of the same manufacturer unless otherwise specified. C. Furnish to the proper trades, all manufacturer's wiring diagrams for installation of mechanical equipment.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0000-4 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS D. Provide tee fittings, elbows, reducers, and other required components to install equipment and control devices furnished by other trades.
2.02 PAINTING A. In general, all of the finish painting will be provided by the contractor, except as specified below: 1. Pumps, motors, expansion tanks, and other factory manufactured parts shall be factory coated with a traditional shop coat of paint, except where there are special finishes required. 2. Any item that is scratched or damaged shall be repainted to match original. B. Paint steel brackets, stands, hangers, etc… as mentioned in this section with a black rust inhibitive paint, compatible with other paints. C. Brackets, hangers, etc... that cannot be painted after installation shall be painted prior to installation.
2.03 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. All electrical equipment shall conform to Division 16, Electrical Specifications and shall be suitable for operation on the voltage and phase available at the building site. These characteristics shall be verified by the Contractor prior to ordering equipment. B. Provide motors as required for proper operation of all equipment furnished under this Division. The minimum motor horsepower ratings are specified or scheduled on the drawings. Minimum requirements for all motors are as follows: 1. Dustproof/leak-proof bearing rings 2. Factory balanced 3. TEFC Industrial duty 4. Thermal overload protection 5. Minimum efficiencies shall not be less than values in NEMA MGI 12.54 6. Minimum efficiencies - 1-4HP, 78.5%; 5-9HP 89%. 7. Furnish starters with thermal overload protection for all motors provided. 8. All starters for three-phase motors shall be magnetic complete with the following accessories: 9. Three-leg overload protection 10. Control transformers with fused primary and secondary 11. 120 volt holding coils 12. Integral hand-off-auto switch 13. Auxiliary contacts required for system operation plus one spare 14. Conform to NEC and NEMA requirements. C. All starters for single-phase motors shall be horsepower rated thermal overload switches, unless magnetic starters are required for automatic control. If magnetic starters are necessary, provide as per above. D. Furnish all necessary control devices such as speed controls, transformers, and relays as required for proper operation of all equipment furnished under this Division. E. Furnish all remote switches and/or pushbutton stations required for manually operated equipment complete with pilot lights of an approved type lighted by current from load side of starter. F. All disconnects for the proposed mechanical equipment shall be “fused” and shall be as provided by the EC. Non-fused disconnects that come as standard factory installation with some mechanical equipment shall not be provided.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0000-5 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS G. Motors, starters, and other electrical control equipment installed in moist areas or areas of special conditions, shall be designed and approved for installation in such areas. They shall be labeled as noted below. H. Furnish identification as to purpose for each switch and/or pushbutton station furnished herein. Identification may be either engraved plastic sign or permanent mounting to wall below switch, or stamping on switch cover proper. All such identification signs and/or switch covers in finished areas shall match other hardware in the immediate area.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all work with a neat and orderly appearance, as specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. Make all installations structurally sound throughout. C. Coordinate mechanical work with all other trades. D. Locate all installations to avoid interference with equipment, storage areas, work of other trades, and traffic areas. E. Perform all work incidental to the installation of the apparatus and materials including, but not limited to, cutting, patching, trenching, excavating, backfilling, trench covering, plastering and the constructing of chases, slots, furring, foundations, piers and pads, when applicable. All work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable Divisions of this Specification by qualified workmen regularly employed in the applicable trades. F. The Contractor for the work of general construction will provide all boxed openings, chases, recesses, lintels and bucks required for the admission of the work. The MC shall furnish him with all necessary information in ample time. G. If openings, chases, recesses, lintels or bucks are omitted or not correctly located, the MC shall bear the cost of subsequent patching as required. H. Do not cut walls or floors that are waterproofed or pierce any structural member without written permission from the Architect. I. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to relocate terminal equipment (10) ten feet in any direction from locations indicated on plans, before roughing-in, with no change in contract price. J. All equipment shall be installed true, level and in the location shown on the drawings. K. Furnish and install all necessary guides, anchors, bolts and other accessories required with the installation of the equipment. L. All equipment shall be installed as to provide necessary access for maintenance and operation. M. Contractor is responsible for sizing, locating and design of all anchor pads, piers, thrust blocks, curb supports, structural steel supports and other structural support items as required. N. Provide all brackets and/or supports as required for mechanical installations in excess of building structure. Submit shop drawings of intended construction for review as required.
3.02 INSTRUCTIONS A. On completion of the job, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide a competent technician to thoroughly instruct the Owner's representative in the care and operation of the mechanical and plumbing systems. The total period of instruction shall not exceed 24 hours by the MC. Time shall not be used all at one time. It shall be used in intervals as deemed necessary by the Owner’s Representative. The time and number of personnel for instruction shall be arranged with the Owner’s Representative.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0000-6 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section “Cutting and Patching”. B. Perform cutting and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover work to allow installation of late work. 2. Remove and replace defective work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to the construction documents. 4. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. C. During cutting and patching, protect adjacent area structure, furnishings and finishes. D. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or barriers to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to the adjacent areas.
3.04 CODE CONFORMANCE A. Install all systems of Division 23 sections in conformance with all applicable State of Vermont codes and City of Burlington, VT codes in addition to the standards listed in the Division 23 specifications. B. Codes include but are not limited to the following: 1. 2015 Vermont Fire & Building Safety Code 2. 2015 The Uniform Fire Code, NFPA 1 3. 2016 International Building Code 4. 2015 International Plumbing Code 5. 2015 Vermont Plumbing Rules 6. 2015 CBES 7. 2012 Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems, NFPA 90A 8. National Gas Code, NFPA 54
3.05 INFORMATION FOR OTHER DIVISIONS A. Provide all information concerning the equipment or work of Division 15 required by other Divisions in ample time to prevent delay in building progress.
3.06 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Provide all excavating and backfilling required in connection with the work under this Division. B. Include provisions for repairing of finished surfaces, all required shoring, bracing, pumping, and protection for safety of persons and property. C. Backfilling and compaction shall be in conformance with "Earthwork Division" of these specifications. Backfilling shall not be done until pipe lines are properly tested in the presence of the Architect or Plumbing Inspector.
3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. When all work, testing, balancing, initial start-up and operation instructions have been completed the Contractor shall notify Architect and arrange for final acceptance. B. Contractor shall have all necessary test data complete in accordance with specifications and at hand during inspection. C. Items found not in accordance with Contract Documents or items functioning incorrectly will be itemized and submitted in writing to the Contractor for correction.
3.08 CLEANING A. Do not allow refuse and surplus materials to accumulate and obstruct the construction site.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0000-7 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS B. Upon completion of the installation, remove refuse and surplus materials from the construction site and leave the building neat and clean. C. Repair any items that have been scratched or damaged during construction. Any item repaired or refinished shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.
3.09 GUARANTEE A. Contractor by accepting the plans and specifications and signing the contract shall guarantee the following: B. All equipment, accessories and material furnished by him for a period of one year from final acceptance, against all defects in material and workmanship. C. If equipment fails, does not operate satisfactorily or shows undue wear, the Contractor will be notified and will be required to remedy the defect immediately at his own expense. D. That all equipment will produce the result specified or required. E. That all piping shall be drip-tight, properly installed and free of vibration, pounding or objectionable noise. F. Guarantee shall extend for one (1) year from date of acceptance by the Owner except where items of equipment, etc., are guaranteed by manufacturer for periods in excess of this time, manufacturer's guarantee shall take preference. END OF SECTION 23 0000
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0000-8 February 19, 2021 REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0500 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies piping materials and installation methods common to more than one section of Division 23 and includes joining materials, piping specialties, and basic piping installation instructions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0000. B. Product Data: Submit product data on the following items: 1. Escutcheons 2. Mechanical Sleeve Seals 3. Mechanical equipment nameplate data 4. Wall and floor sleeves 5. Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment. 6. Miscellaneous lumber for support and anchorage of mechanical materials and equipment. 7. Fire stopping caulk 8. Elastomeric joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment. 9. Access Panels 10. Spare Filters for HVAC Equipment C. Quality Control Submittals (Welding) 1. Contractor’s procedure qualification record (form PQR) for brazing and welding. 2. Contractor’s format for welding procedure specification (form WPS) and brazing procedure specification (form BPS). 3. Individual welder’s qualification tests for each of the contractor’s PQR’s. Welder certification test must be administered within twelve months prior to the commencement of work.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use only thoroughly trained and experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the types of piping accessories required, the manufacturers' installation recommendations and the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Welding procedure qualifications: 1. Contractor shall submit for review the Contractor’s standard procedures. Procedure shall be submitted on PQR form as described in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Welder’s Qualifications: 1. All welders shall be certified to the WPS as listed on the Contractor’s PQR. Certifications are to be performed by an independent testing laboratory within twelve months prior to the commencement of work.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0500-1 February 19, 2021 MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. Each welder is to stamp the pipe adjacent to each weld performed by them. During the submittal process, the Contractor is required to provide a list of each welder’s name and the mark used by each welder. D. Tack Welding: Tack welding may be performed by non-certified welders. All tack welds, whether performed by certified or non-certified welders, must be ground out and removed. E. No welding may take place until a satisfactory reviewed submittal is complete.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide factory applied plastic end caps on each length of pipe and tube, except for hub and spigot pipe. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. C. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers and fire stopping under temperature and humidity conditions within the limits permitted by the manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers and fire stopping to wet substrates.
1.07 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of utility services with the Owner and the utility company. B. Notify the Architect at least 5 days prior to commencing demolition operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 23 for specifications on piping and fittings relative to that particular system. B. All pipe and fittings shall be fabricated in the USA or Canada. C. Elbows for all pipe sizes 2" diameter and over shall be long radius type (1.5R). D. Use reducers, increasers, or reducing tees for change of pipe size. Bushings are not allowed. E. Forged steel branch connectors, per the limits set forth in Part 3 of this section, may be used to create branch connections in steel piping systems. All branch connectors shall be 3,000# fittings. 1. “Weld-O-Lets”, “Thread-O-Lets”, or “Sock-O-Lets” 2. “Trans-O-Con”
2.02 JOINING MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. B. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Provide gasketed material for full faced cast iron flanges and raised face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or B16.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being carried. Gasket type shall be spiral wound 304 stainless steel/graphite type for
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0500-2 February 19, 2021 MATERIALS AND METHODS raised faced joints; NBR gaskets shall be used for flat faced joints. Red rubber gaskets are not allowed.
2.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Steel Escutcheons: Chrome plated, stamped steel, hinged, split ring escutcheon, with set screw. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. Where escutcheons are to be painted, furnish prime painted. B. Plastic style snap on type escutcheons: Provide chrome plated for exposed finish areas, plain finish for mechanical rooms and areas which will be painted. 2.04 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
2.05 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA A. Nameplate: For each piece of power operated mechanical equipment provide a permanent operational data nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.
2.06 WALL AND FLOOR SLEEVES A. Sheet Metal Sleeves (light): 20 gage galvanized sheet metal with Pittsburgh lock longitudinal joint. B. Sheet Metal Sleeves (heavy): 16 gage galvanized sheet metal with pipe or Pittsburgh lock longitudinal joint. C. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 10, steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS METALS A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and grating: ASTM A 36. B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. D. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications. E. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 2 Common boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 2 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED EXT, with exterior glue; thickness as indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 23/32 inches.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0500-3 February 19, 2021 MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.09 FIRE STOPPING A. General: Fire stopping caulk and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application. All products shall be installed in the manner determined by the manufacturer as tested by an independent testing laboratory. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products 2. Spec Seal (Specified Technologies Inc.) 3. Rectorseal Corporation 4. HILTI
2.10 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALERS A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application. B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. General Duty: One-part, neutral core silicone sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on exterior and interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces of concrete, masonry, glass, aluminum, and steel. D. Wet Locations: Provide manufacturer’s standard one part, mildew resistant, paintable silicone sealant that is recommended for exposed locations on interior ceramic tile, masonry, and metals in bathroom and shower room locations. E. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning 2. General Electric 3. Pecora Corp. 4. Tremco, Inc.
2.11 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels as shown on plans and where required for access to concealed valves, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, and equipment servicing. B. Panels located in public areas are to have keyed locks. C. Access panels are to have Underwriters' Laboratories B label fire rating where installation is required in fire rated walls or ceiling. D. All panels shall have hinged access doors. E. Deliver all panels to general contractor for installation. Provide instructions for their location in sufficient time so that panels can be installed in the normal course of work. F. Coordinate final location of all access panels with CM/architect prior to installation.
2.12 SPARE SET OF FILTERS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT A. The MC shall provide a spare set of filters for all mechanical equipment on the Project requiring air filtration. They shall be installed at the completion of the project prior to building occupancy.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0500-4 February 19, 2021 MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which pipe and piping accessories are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Coordination: It is the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate the work of his trade with all other trades prior to the commencement of construction. Any conflicts must be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Any work requiring removal and re-installation due to the lack of coordination shall be the responsibility of the contractors with no additional cost to the owner. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of piping and fittings before assembly.
3.03 PIPING AND FITTING INSTALLATIONS A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. B. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated otherwise C. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. D. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated on the Drawings. E. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1" clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. F. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves. G. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, ¾" ball valve with hose connection, cap and chain. Install vents at high points. Pitch water piping upward in direction of flow and arrange fittings to permit air to be vented to system high points or to expansion tank, and to permit complete drainage to low points. Use eccentric fittings where necessary. High point vents shall be extended as required such that the piping termination is accessible. H. Temporarily cover the open ends of all pipes not actively being installed and at the end of each work day to prohibit the influx of foreign materials. I. Arrange piping to provide adequate provision for thermal expansion and contraction to prevent undue strains on piping or apparatus connected. Arrange branches to take up motion or strain. J. Use fittings for all changes in direction, at all branch connections, and for change in pipe size. K. Remake leaking joints using new materials. L. Reductions in pipe size made with eccentric reducers shall have the tops level for water piping and bottoms level for steam piping. M. Run all horizontal building drains at uniform pitch. Follow indicated lines generally, but make exact layout on the job to work actual fitting dimensions, align piping and avoid interferences.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0500-5 February 19, 2021 MATERIALS AND METHODS Unless otherwise specified or required by code, provide proper support to maintain uniform fall of 1/4" per foot for lines 3 inches and smaller and 1/8" per foot for lines larger than 3".
3.04 PIPING JOINT PREPARATION A. Steel Pipe Joints: 1. Pipe 2-1/2" and Smaller: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint sealant or Teflon tape suitable for the service for which the pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than three threads exposed. 2. Pipe Larger Than 2-1/2": Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for "Power Piping," B31.1 and per the contractor’s tested Welding Procedure Specification (WPS). 3. Install weld neck flanges at all valves, appurtenances, and equipment with flange type connections. Weld pipe flanges to pipe ends in accordance with ASME B31.1 Code for "Power Piping." Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Align flange surfaces parallel. Use suitable lubricants, such as Never Seize, on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench. Do not mate flat face flanges with raised face flanges. 4. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench. B. Non-ferrous Pipe Joints: 1. Brazed Joints: For copper tube and fitting joints, braze joints in accordance with the AWS “Soldering Manual”, the contractor’s tested Procedure Qualification Record, ANSI B31.1 - Standard Code for Pressure Piping, "Power Piping", ANSI B9.1 - Standard Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration and the following: a. Fill and allow a trickle flow of an inert gas (ie., nitrogen) through the pipe and fittings during brazing to prevent formation of scale. Caution must be exercised not to allow the inert gas to deplete the oxygen, causing asphyxiation. b. Heat joints using oxyacetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature. c. After installation of piping, but prior to installation of outlet valves, blow lines clear with nitrogen. 2. Soldered Joints: For copper tube and fitting joints, solder joints in accordance with the AWS “Soldering Manual” and “The Copper Handbook”. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the fittings, using very fine emery cloth, prior to making soldered joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces. 3. Copper and Brass Threaded Joint Pipe 2-1/2" and Smaller: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint sealant or Teflon tape suitable for the service for which the pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than three threads exposed. C. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench. D. Joints for other piping materials are specified within the respective piping system sections.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0500-6 February 19, 2021 MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.05 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Install per manufacturer’s recommended practices. The sleeve must be clean and dry prior to installation. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves and inserts for all duct and piping. B. Provide cutting and patching as required to install mechanical and duct piping. C. Make sleeves in floors and partitions of galvanized steel pipe. D. Make sleeves of extra heavy cast iron pipe or galvanized steel pipe in outside walls, foundations and footings. E. Sleeves for insulated pipe shall be of sufficient size to pass insulation and of sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe where expansion and contraction occur. F. Sleeves for bare pipe shall be two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through G. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions and ceilings. Terminate sleeves ¼" above finished floors, except in rooms having floor drains, where sleeves shall be extended 3/4" above floor. H. Fill space between sleeve and pipe in underground walls with oakum and caulk watertight on both sides of wall. I. Fill space between sleeves and pipe with fiberglass blanket insulation when sleeve does not occur in an underground wall. J. Sleeves through fire rated walls, shafts, floor and partitions shall be packed full length with UL listed fill to maintain the rating of the separation.
3.07 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."
3.08 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.09 APPLICATIONS OF FIRESTOPPING CAULK A. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: The Contractor must determine the penetration is of suitable size and is properly prepared for installation of the fire caulk. Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around mechanical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency. 3.10 APPLICATION OF ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALER A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of elastomeric joint sealants.
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0500-7 February 19, 2021 MATERIALS AND METHODS B. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer. C. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Refer to individual piping system specification sections. Test all pipe prior to the installation of insulation.
END OF SECTION 23 0500
Georgia Highway Garage BASIC MECHANICAL 23 0500-8 February 19, 2021 MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 23 0529 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of pipe hangers and supports for interior and exposed piping. B. This section includes the following: 1. Horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Vertical piping clamps. 3. Hanger rod attachments. 4. Building attachments. 5. Saddles and shields. 6. Stanchions and pipe rolls. 7. Miscellaneous materials. 8. Pipe alignment guides. 9. Anchors. 10. Equipment supports. C. Related work specified elsewhere includes:
Basic Materials and Methods 22 0000 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 23 0500 Plumbing 23 2113
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use only thoroughly trained and experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the types of supports and hangers required, the manufacturers' recommendations and the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel.” C. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Grinnell, F & S Manufacturing, Crawford, or approved equal. E. Unless unavailable, all components of the pipe suspension systems shall be products prefabricated by an acceptable manufacturer whose primary work is the fabrication of such devices.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0000. B. Provide catalog cuts showing the types of hangers, supports and attachments proposed for use. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle all components of the pipe suspension system to avoid rusting, twisting, and the stripping of threads and from damage of any type.
Georgia Highway Garage PIPE HANGERS AND 23 0529-1 February 19, 2021 SUPPORTS PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL A. Provide a sufficient quantity of hangers and supports to maintain the pipelines, apparatus, and equipment in proper position and alignment under all operating conditions with due allowance for expansion and contraction. Provide hangers and supports of standard design where possible and that are best suited for the service required. Where required, provide hangers and supports that are screw adjustable after installation. B. Attach hangers and supports within buildings to walls, floors, ceilings, or beams, as appropriate. C. Minimize the injury hazard in all protruding supporting devices. Provide end caps on exposed ends of framing members. D. Include proper pipe protection saddles for pipes that are covered with insulation. E. Provide hot-dipped galvanized (ASTM B-6) when galvanizing is specified or required. F. Locate supports so that at least one support is provided per full pipe length.
2.02 PIPE SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Saddles 1. Use pipe saddles that are shaped to fit the pipe that they will support and that are capable of screw adjustment. 2. Use floor stands or wall brackets to support saddles. B. Stanchions 1. Provide pipe stanchion saddles with yokes and nuts; of similar construction to saddles. 2. Use floor stands or wall brackets to support stanchions. C. Pipe Rolls 1. Provide adjustable pipe rolls. 2. Use floor stands, wall brackets, or ceiling or beam supports to support pipe rolls. D. Overhead Hangers - Support by threaded rods suspended from wall brackets or ceiling and beam supports. E. Saddles - Insulated pipe where specified to be continuous through hanger shall be protected at points of support with thermal hanger shields as manufactured by Pipe Shields, Inc. or equal of Insulshield or Uni-Grip. Thermal hanger shields shall consist of a 360-degree insert of high density, 100 psi, water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in a 360-degree sheet metal shield. Insert to be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. Shield length and minimum sheet metal gauges shown in chart below. If pipe hanger spacing exceeds 10 feet, utilize double layer shield on bearing surface.
Pipe Size Shield Length Minimum Gauge
1/2” – 1-1/2” 4” 26 2” – 6” 6” 20 F. Anchors 1. Provide cast-iron chair type anchors with steel straps, except where anchors form an integral part of pipe fittings or where an anchor of special design is required. 2. Fasten anchors rigidly to wall brackets or directly to the structure.
Georgia Highway Garage PIPE HANGERS AND 23 0529-2 February 19, 2021 SUPPORTS G. Non-adjustable Supports 1. Where adjustable supporting devices are not required, pipelines 3-inches in diameter or smaller may be supported using hooks, hook plates, rings, or ring plates made of cast- iron, malleable iron, polyvinyl chloride, or steel. 2. Mount as required or as directed by the Engineer.
2.03 MOUNTING DEVICES A. Floor Stands 1. Brick and Concrete Piers - Shape the pier to conform accurately to the bottom one-third to one-half of the pipe. 2. Saddle Stands - Use a length of pipe fitted at the base with a standard threaded flange and at the top with an adjustable saddle, pipe roll, or stanchion. Bolt the base of the flange to the floor, foundation, or concrete base. B. Wall Brackets 1. Provide welded steel support brackets. 2. Design wall brackets for three maximum loads classified as follows:
Light 750 pounds Medium 1500 pounds Heavy 3000 pounds
3. Furnish and install back plates of adequate size and thickness to distribute the load against the wall when bolting brackets to walls. When the use of back plates is not prac- ticable, fasten the brackets to the wall in such a manner that the safe bearing strength of the wall will not be exceeded. C. Ceiling and Beam Supports 1. Attach rods to the ceiling or beams using suitable adjustable concrete inserts, beam clamps, screws, bolts, or welding. 2. Concrete inserts - Provide galvanized inserts for concrete, recessed near the upper flange to receive reinforcing rods. Design inserts to permit the rods to be adjusted horizontally in one plane and to lock the rod nut or head automatically; to carry safely the maximum load that can be imposed by the rod that they engage; and to be held in position during concrete pouring operations.
2.04 TIE RODS AND CLAMPS A. Furnish and install tie rods, clamps, couplings, and accessories to prevent the movement of branch valves, as indicated on the Drawings or as directed.
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide any materials not specifically shown or described, but required for complete, adequate and proper pipe suspension systems. Select the materials and submit shop drawings to Engineer for acceptance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION/COORDINATION/PREPARATION A. Coordinate the work of the Section with the work of other trades and be sure that built-in items are properly and accurately installed. Also, coordinate with pipe installers to determine the final locations of piping and to ascertain the date by which components of the pipe suspension systems must be available so as not to delay the work of others.
Georgia Highway Garage PIPE HANGERS AND 23 0529-3 February 19, 2021 SUPPORTS B. Carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that such Work is properly cured, braced and complete to the point where this work may properly commence.
3.02 PERFORMANCE A. Piping systems shall be provided with adequate anchorage, sway braces, guides, hangers and supports. Design the components to suit actual pipe installations under full operating conditions. B. Design all support equipment, except for springs, with a minimum factor of safety of 5, based upon the ultimate tensile strength of the material. C. Design hangers and supports, based upon the total weight of the pipe, fittings, valves, insulation, and appurtenances, and the weight of the liquid or gas to be transported or used in testing, whichever is greater. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. Provide suitable linkages to permit swing when lateral or axial movement is anticipated. D. Anchors and guides shall be capable of withstanding all forces imposed upon them, including those from expansion and contraction. E. Design, fabricate and install supports so that they will not disengage as a result of movement in the supported pipe. F. Fit pipe hangers and supports with adequate adjusting nuts, of the locking type, threaded to a rod, which will allow adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. G. Carefully install the pipe suspension system so that pipes remain straight and at the required slopes and grades, free from sags, humps and unnecessary bends and twists. Follow the manufacturers recommended installation instructions. H. All supporting devices shall be designed to minimize interference with access and movement.
3.03 SUPPORT SPACING AND HANGER ROD SIZES A. No Hub Waste Pipe - Horizontally, at every joint; vertically, every 10'. B. Valves - At valves 3" and larger, install supports on each side of valve, spaced no further than 18" from valve except for plastic piping, then 9" from valve. Provide additional supports where required to prevent piping loads from placing damaging stresses on valves and equipment. C. Wall Penetrations - Provide pipe supports on each side of wall where pipe passes through a wall sleeve, spaced no further than 48" from the wall. D. Pipe Couplings - Provide additional supports on each side of pipe couplings, flexible connections, repair clamps and the like, spaced sufficiently close to prevent loads which may cause damage to or leakage from the device. E. Vertical Pipes - Use base fitting or hanger immediately adjacent to base and provide riser clamps as required, but not more than 15' on centers. F. Other Materials and Conditions - Where not included in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings, support piping materials in accordance with the manufacturers' design and installation instructions. Provide supports so as not to overstress the piping system, place stresses on equipment and machinery, cause leakage, or to adversely affect system performance. 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust the pipe suspension systems as required. B. Thoroughly clean the piping support system and prepare exposed components for painting.
END OF SECTION 23 0529
Georgia Highway Garage PIPE HANGERS AND 23 0529-4 February 19, 2021 SUPPORTS SECTION 23 0548 SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS & EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements for seismic protection measure to be applied to equipment and systems specified herein are in addition to any other items called for in other sections of these specifications. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications, firms regularly engaged in manufacture of seismic restraint products, of type, size and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. 2015 International Building Code 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, latest edition. 3. ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, Seismic Restraint Design, latest edition.
1.04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Building equipment requiring seismic restraint shall include the following items indicated on drawings or in other sections of these specifications: 1. Energy Recovery Unit 2. Ceiling Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles, ductwork 3. Fans B. Building systems shall include the following items indicated on drawings or in other sections of these specifications: 1. Domestic Water Systems 2. Sanitary Drainage and Venting and Storm Drainage Systems 3. Ducted Air Systems C. Verify Seismic Criteria and Hazard Level with Architect. Provide all seismic restraint accordingly. 1.05 PIPES AND DUCTS REQUIRING NO SPECIAL SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Seismic restraints may be omitted from the following installations: 1. Piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 1¼” inside diameter. 2. All other piping other than that located in mechanical rooms, less than 2½” inside diameter. 3. All air handling ducts less than 6 square feet in cross sectional area. 4. All piping suspended by individual hangers 12” or less in length from the top of pipe to the bottom of the supporting structure. 5. All ducts suspended by hangers 12” or less in length from the top of the duct to the bottom of the supporting structure.
Georgia Highway Garage SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR 23 0548-1 February 19, 2021 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS & EQUIPMENT 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Mechanical Systems Seismic Restraint Shop Drawings: Detail drawings of the SMACNA Guidelines and additional installation details, as appropriate, for the seismic restraints required shall be submitted. Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicated thickness, type, grade, class of metal, dimensions, and shall show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction. Provide a plan indicating the locations and types of seismic restraints and references to drawing detail types. B. Mechanical Equipment Seismic Restraint Shop Drawings: Detail drawings and installation details, as appropriate, for the seismic restraints required shall be submitted. Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate equipment being restrained, thickness, type, grade and class of metal, dimensions, and shall show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction. The equipment seismic restraint shop drawing submittal shall be project specific and shall bear the stamp of a licensed professional structural engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below: 1. Cold-formed angles shall conform to the material and identification requirements of the latest "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" of the American Iron and Steel Institute with a minimum Fy = 33 ksi and a minimum Fu = 38 ksi. 2. The uncoated minimum steel thickness of the cold-formed product as delivered to the job site shall not at any location be less than 95% of the thickness indicated. The thickness may be less at bends after cold forming.
Gage Standard Uncoated Galvanized Thickness Thickness (inches) (inches) 12 .1046 .1084 14 .0747 .0785 16 .0598 .0635 3. Hot-rolled shapes and plates shall conform to ASTM A36. Pipes used as braces shall be Standard Steel Pipes ASTM A120 or A53. 4. Cables shall be wire-core with a minimum breaking strength as specified. Cable shall be zinc-coated to a minimum of 0.4 ounces/square foot or stainless steel per ASTM A304. Tighten cable only to remove excessive slack.
Size (inches) Breaking Strength (lbs.) 1/4 4,940 3/8 10,980 1/2 19,260 5. Bolts shall conform to ASTM A325. Bolt holes shall be 1/16" larger than the bolt diameter unless noted otherwise. 6. Expansion anchors shall have values equal to or greater than both the shear and tension capacities listed. Cast-in-place concrete inserts may replace expansion anchors where the approved loads are equal to greater than the values for the specified expansion anchors.
Georgia Highway Garage SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR 23 0548-2 February 19, 2021 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS & EQUIPMENT Expansion Anchor Shear Capacity (lbs.) Tension Capacity Size(inches) (lbs.) 3/8 675 615 1/2 1,130 1,040 5/8 1,580 1,535 3/4 2,270 2,020 7/8 5,060 3,705 7. Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1 and shall use either the shielded or submerged arc methods.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS BRACING A. All ductwork and piping that is not excluded from seismic restraint as specified in this section shall be provided with seismic restraint in accordance with Seismic Hazard Level (SHL) C of the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
3.02 EQUIPMENT BRACING A. Equipment bracing shall be provided for all items as specified in this section. Braces shall consist of angles, rods, bars, or pipes secured at both ends with not less than 1/2 inch bolts. Bracing shall be provided in two planes of directions, 90° apart, for each item of equipment. Sufficient braces shall be provided for equipment to resist horizontal forces without exceeding safe working stress of bracing components. Details of all equipment bracing shall be submitted for review. In lieu of bracing with vertical supports, these items may be supported with hangers included at 45° directed up and radially away from equipment and oriented symmetrically in 90° intervals on the horizontal plane, bisecting the angle of each corner of the equipment, provided that supporting members are properly sized to support operating weight of equipment when hangers are included at a 45° angle.
END OF SECTION 23 0548
Georgia Highway Garage SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR 23 0548-3 February 19, 2021 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS & EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Other Division 23 Sections specify balancing devices and their installation, and materials and installations of mechanical systems.
1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures for total mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the hydronic and air quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications and recording and reporting the results. B. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems as shown on the plans: 1. All air systems. 2. All domestic hot water recirculation systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes: 1. The balance of heating water, domestic recirculation water and air distribution. 2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities. 3. Electrical measurement. 4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls. B. Approved Equal: Material, equipment, or method approved by the engineer for use in the work as being acceptable as an equivalent in essential attributes to the material, equipment, or method specified in the contract documents.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: 1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications and recording and reporting the results. 2. The independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project. 3. In lieu of satisfying the requirements of section 1.4.A.2, the contractor need not be certified, but rather, have a minimum of ten years experience with similar projects. The contractor shall provide suitable evidence of past performance, including references, justifying the firm’s capabilities. This does not relieve the contractor from the provisions stipulated in section 1.4.B
Georgia Highway Garage TESTING, ADJUSTING AND 23 0593-1 February 19, 2021 BALANCING B. Codes and Standards: 1. NEBB: “Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems’. 2. AABC: “National Standards for Total System Balance”. 3. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications, Chapter 34, “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing”. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the signature of the test and balance lead technician. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured to establish normal operating values of the systems. Final reports shall be type written, organized and formatted as specified below. B. Report Format: Report forms shall be those included in the first submittal for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Send report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in electronic .pdf format. Provide binding edge labels with the project identification and a title descriptive of the contents. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs: 1. General Information and Summary 2. Air Systems 3. Hydronic Systems 4. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Systems 5. Reports Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data: a. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project; including addresses, contact names, and telephone numbers. Provide a listing of the instruments used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration. b. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC or NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before water and refrigerant systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRE-BALANCE PROCEDURES A. General Procedures 1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent.
Georgia Highway Garage TESTING, ADJUSTING AND 23 0593-2 February 19, 2021 BALANCING B. Air System Procedures 1. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine variations of installation from design. 2. Check filters for cleanliness. System shall be started up with construction filters. Construction filters shall be left at the fan coil units and energy recovery units until completion of the inspections as a means of verifying the construction filters were used and then replaced prior to acceptance testing. 3. Check lubrication of all motors and bearings. 4. Check fan belt tension. 5. Check fan rotation. C. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation System Procedures 1. Examine domestic hot water recirculation system and determine if water has been treated and cleaned. 2. Check pump rotation. 3. Check that the system is completely full of water. 4. Check lubrication of all motors and bearings as required.
3.02 MEASUREMENTS A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against damage. B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards. C. Use only those instruments that have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best suited to the function being measured. D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the value being measured. F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings that will result in a repeatability error of less than 10%. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained. G. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task.
3.03 GENERAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING REQUIREMENTS A. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. B. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. C. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks. D. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. E. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials. F. As part of the scope of this specification section, the contractor shall make any changes in the pulleys, belts, or sheaves, as required, for correct balance at no additional cost to the owner. G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results. H. Retest, adjust, and balance systems a second time if required for "comfort" balance.
Georgia Highway Garage TESTING, ADJUSTING AND 23 0593-3 February 19, 2021 BALANCING 3.04 AIR SYSTEM BALANCING PROCEDURE A. Prepare individual schematic drawings of each air system. B. Perform a system profile of all air systems indicating on the previously developed sketch the pressure drop of each air handler component, including the inlet and discharge plenums. C. Artificially load the air filters in air handling units to simulate the midpoint resistance. Balance the duct distribution system when in this mode. D. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses. Establish overall fan flow at or above design point. E. Establish airflow at all terminal inlets and outlets at design point. If necessary, adjust main fan speed to deliver more air. Determine leakage based on difference between main system traverse and sum of terminal inlets and outlets. F. Verify fan and motor operating characteristics and compare to manufacturer’s fan curve. G. Where air systems have a variable speed drive, set at 90% speed and adjust sheaves to deliver required air at this speed. H. Prepare schematic diagrams of system “as-built” ductwork to facilitate reporting.
3.05 DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION SYSTEM BALANCING PROCEDURE A. Initiate balancing with discharge balance valve full open to allow full flow to system. B. Through a global control system command or other means, force all domestic hot water recirculation circuit setters to the full open position. C. Establish flow at all circuit setters at the design flow.
3.06 RECORD AND REPORT DATA A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced standards, and as approved on the sample report forms. B. The Balancing Contractor shall identify any problem areas, if they exist. The Mechanical Contractor shall work with the Balancing Contractor to correct the issues until the system is successfully balanced and operable. END OF SECTION 25 0593
Georgia Highway Garage TESTING, ADJUSTING AND 23 0593-4 February 19, 2021 BALANCING SECTION 23 0700 MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of insulation materials as follows: 1. Insulate all interior hot, cold and hot water recirculation potable water lines, whether exposed or not. 2. Insulated all hydronic heating supply and return piping. 3. Insulate the supply air ductwork from the furnaces (where concealed). 4. Insulate all refrigeration piping per manufacturer’s requirements. B. Abbreviations 1. BTU – British Thermal Units 2. SF – Square Feet 3. Hr. – Hour 4. °F – Degrees Fahrenheit
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be familiar with the type of materials being installed and the material manufacturers' recommended methods of installation and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. B. Appearance shall be of equal importance with its mechanical correctness and efficiency.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0000. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation methods for each type of mechanical insulation specified in the schedule. Submit manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturers’ recommendations. B. Deliver, store and handle materials in a manner such that damage is avoided and the insulating properties are not decreased.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Johns Manville Products Corp. 2. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. 3. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 4. Certainteed Corp. 5. IMCOA
2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS
Georgia Highway Garage MECHANICAL INSUALTION 23 0700-1 February 19, 2021 Insulating material and methods of installation shall conform to the following: A. Type A: One piece of half sectional fiberglass insulation jacketed with Owens-Corning Fiberglass, or equal, Fiberglass 25ASJ/SSL-II all service vapor barrier jacket. 1. K: 0.24 BtuH in./°F sq. ft. at 75°F mean temperature. 2. Operating temperatures: -60°F to 450°F. 3. Jacket water vapor permeance: not more than 0.02 perm./inch. 4. Jacket and butt strips: factory applied, self-sealing pressure sensitive adhesive or a conventional lap-seal adhesive. 5. Surface burning characteristic ratings as tested by ASTM E-84, UL 723, or NFPA 255 not exceeding: a. Flame Spread 25 b. Smoke Developed 50 B. Type C: Flexible, elastomeric thermal insulation, Armstrong Armaflex II or equal. 1. K: 0.27 BtuH in./°F sq. ft. at 75°F mean temperature. 2. Operating temperatures: -20°F to 220°F. 3. Water vapor permeance: not more than 0.20 perm./inch. 4. Seal seams and butt joints with Armstrong 520. 5. Fitting covers: fabricate and install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Type C insulation shall not be used in air plenums or where prohibited by code. C. Type G: Foil-reinforced kraft faced vapor barrier jacketed, inorganic glass fiber blanket insulation, Owens-Corning Fiberglass T-100 FSK Faced Duct Work Insulation, Commercial Grade, or equal. 1. K: 0.30 BtuH in./°F sq. ft. at 75°F mean temperature. 2. Operating temperatures: 40°F to 250°F. 3. Jacket water vapor permeance: not more than 0.02 perm. /inch. 4. Wrap insulation tightly on ductwork with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2"; ductwork over 24" wide use mechanical fasteners spaced not more than 18" on center. 5. Adhere insulation to sheet metal with Foster 85-17 bonding adhesive. D. Type H: Bonded mat of glass fiber insulation coated with a permacote coating and EPA - Registered anti-microbial agent on the airstream side, John Manville Permacote Linacoustic HP. 1. K: 0.26 BtuH in./°F sq. ft. at 75°F mean temperature. 2. Operating temperature: to 250°F. 3. Airstream side coating shall prevent insulation erosion at velocities up to 6,000 fpm. 4. Attach liner to duct with both mechanical fasteners and Foster 85-62 adhesive in conformance with SMACNA "Duct Liner Application Standard", latest edition. 5. Install per manufacturer’s installation requirements. E. Type K: ADA compliant. Insulation with a white, fitted anti-microbial pipe cover. Cover shall be designed to allow access to the stop valves. Provide the following manufacturer: 1. Lav Guard; Truebro, Inc. F. Type L: Kitchen exhaust ductwork firewrap, Thermal Ceramics Firemaster® FastWrap XL or equal. 1. Meets ASTM E 2336 2. Zero Clearance to combustibles at any location. 3. 1-1/2 in. thick, 6 pcf density 4. Operating temperatures: to 2000-degree F.
Georgia Highway Garage MECHANICAL INSUALTION 23 0700-2 February 19, 2021 5. Butt joints on inside layer. 6. Fully foil encapsulated. 7. To be applied in 2 layers.
2.03 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials, not specifically described within but required for complete, adequate and proper insulating systems, shall be as selected by Contractor and subject to the acceptance of Engineer. B. The thickness of all alternate insulating materials used shall be such as to provide the same minimum insulating efficiency as the specified as the specified materials at the thickness scheduled. C. Refer to Specification Section 3.03-D below for pipe fitting insulation requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where this work may properly commence. B. Verify that pipelines to be insulated have been tested and accepted.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove all dirt, scale and rust from surfaces and thoroughly dry. B. Prepare surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommended installation instructions. B. Install insulation with longitudinal seams toward walls or ceilings and with joints butted firmly together to eliminate voids. C. Install pipe covering protectors, at each pipe hanger or support, simultaneously with the insulation. Also, provide pipe covering protectors at locations where insulation is subject to damage from traffic. Refer to Section 15 094 for pipe saddle requirements. D. Install pre-fabricated, mitered insulation on fittings, valve bodies, flanges, and unions to the same thickness and with the same material as adjacent piping insulation. This insulation shall be installed to fit the fittings, valve bodies, flanges and unions. “Hand stuffing” of loose insulation at the fittings is not acceptable. E. Secure rigid insulation with stainless steel bands. Water and heating pipe insulation shall be zipped, or joints sealed with an adhesive. Use of wire is not permitted. F. Pipe and duct insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings except where walls and floors are required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire resistance rating. Where this occurs, the open space remaining between the sleeve and pipe and/or duct shall be filled with fire stop insulation. Duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers and fire doors so as not to interfere with their operation. G. Insulation on all cold surfaces must be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Supports, anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces must be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. H. All exposed raw edges shall be finished with finishing cement.
Georgia Highway Garage MECHANICAL INSUALTION 23 0700-3 February 19, 2021 I. Insulated cold pipes shall be insulated continuously through hangers. Rigid insulation inserts are to be provided at all pipe hangers and supports. Pipe insulation shall about the rigid in- sulation insert. Apply a wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on all butt joints and seal the joints with 3” wide vapor barrier tape or band.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust the work as required to attain maximum insulating capabilities and to achieve a neat, clean appearance. Clean work to remove dirt, labels, and other materials.
3.05 INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Contractor shall provide insulation as per the following Schedule:
Service Location Type Size Thickness PIPING Domestic Cold-Water Piping All A All ½” Domestic Hot Water Piping All A All 1” Domestic Hot Water Recirculation All A All ½” Plumbing vent piping Within 6’ of roof outlet A or C All 1” Per manufacturer’s Refrigeration Piping All recommendations ADA lavatory piping Under lavatory K All - DUCTWORK Supply air ductwork All G All 1-1/2” Outdoor air ductwork to Furnace All G All 2” plenum Furnace return air plenum All G All 2”
Notes: 1. The Type A insulation noted for heating hot water piping, domestic hot water piping, and domestic cold-water piping applies to copper piping. If the piping is to be pex, Type C insulation shall be provided at the thickness noted above.
END OF SECTION 23 0700
Georgia Highway Garage MECHANICAL INSUALTION 23 0700-4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 23 2113 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes the material requirements for pipe and pipe fittings for piping provided under this Division unless otherwise indicated. B. Related work specified elsewhere includes: Basic Mechanical Requirements 23 0000 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 0500 Piping Specialties 23 2116 Pipe Hangers and Supports 23 0529 Mechanical Insulation 23 0700 Plumbing 22 0000
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. See Section 23 0000.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Each length of pipe delivered to the site shall be clearly marked with the name of the manufacturer, class of pipe and pipe diameter. Store in accordance with manufacturers approved instructions. B. Carefully handle all pipes and fittings when loading and unloading. C. Comply with all other recommendations of the manufacturers. D. All pipe and pipe fittings shall meet ruling codes and regulations and shall be used and installed according to the ruling codes and regulations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Pipe and pipe fittings for each service shall conform to the following schedule:
2.01 QUALITY OF PIPING (All standards shall be of the latest editions). A. Copper tube, Type "L", hard temper: ANSI H23.1. B. Copper tube, Type "K", soft temper: ANSI H23.1. C. Cast iron soil pipe, service weight: C.I.S.P.I. HS-67. D. Cast iron soil pipe, no hub: C.I.S.P.I., IAMPO. E. Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40: ANSI B36.20. F. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40: ANSI B36.20. G. P.V.C. (Polyvinylchloride) - ASTM D3034. H. Black steel pipe - Schedule 40: Coated and Wrapped. I. Black steel pipe, Schedule 80: ANSI B36.20. J. Brass pipe fittings. K. Ductile iron pipe - Class 50-56. L. FRP Pressure Carrier Pipe - chemically resistant resins reinforced with fiberglass filament. Rated 150 PSIG working pressure at 250 degrees F.
Georgia Highway Garage PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 23 2113-1 February 19, 2021 M. Polypropylene: ASTM D635; rated SE-O in accord with UL94. N. Hard drawn copper refrigeration tubing. Cleaned and sealed. O. Polyethylene: ASTM D1248, ASTM D2737, AWWA CTS C901 P. Pex tubing, high-density cross-linked polyethylene with oxygen barrier: ASTM F 876 Q. Pex tubing, high-density cross-linked polyethylene with no barrier, suitable for domestic water usage, ASTM F 876
2.02 QUALITY OF FITTINGS (All standards shall be of the latest editions). A. Copper water tube solder joint fittings: Cast brass ANSI B16.18. B. Copper water tube flared joint fittings. Listed for underground service. C. Cast iron soil fittings, service weight: C.I.S.P.I., IAMPO. D. Cast iron, no hub fittings, C.I.S.P.I., IAMPO. E. Galvanized malleable iron fittings, 150 psig: ANSI B16.3. F. Black malleable iron fittings, 150 psig: ANSI B16.3. G. Steel butt welding fittings, A-106 seamless carbon steel, Schedule 40: ANSI B16.5; 150 psig welding neck forged steel flanges. H. P.V.C. (polyvinylchloride) - ASTM D3034. I. Cast Brass Compression: 85-5-5-5. J. Single rubber sealing type or mechanical joints AWWA specification C110. K. Bell X Bell - same material as that of the carrier pipe. L. Same material as pipe. M. Copper refrigeration tube solder joint fittings. N. Same material as pipe: ASTM F 1807 O. Brass PEX fittings and adapters 2.03 JOINTS A. Brazed Joints Silver Brazing Alloy: "Stay-Silv "45" or approved equal. Flux: Silver brazing flux as approved. Remove excess flux. Remake leaky joints with new pipe and fittings. B. Threaded Joints Ream and/or file before installation to remove all burrs. Remove all metal chips and filings. Pipe joint compound shall be suitable for service. C. Gasketed Joints Materials and methods shall be as recommended by the pipe and fittings Manufacturer and shall comply with C.I.S.P.I. HSN-68T. D. No Hub Joints Materials and methods shall be as recommended by the pipe and fittings manufacturer and shall comply with C.I.S.P.I. and IAMPO. E. Welded Joints F. Solvent Weld Joints
Georgia Highway Garage PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 23 2113-2 February 19, 2021 G. Soldered Joints 95-5 Tin-Antimony solder Flux: Paste form as approved Remove excess solder and flux H. Mechanical Joints I. Fuseal joints; as manufactured by R&G Sloane. J. Compression; crimp or cinch
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Interior and exposed piping installations are specified in other Division 15 Sections
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect pipe for compliance with the applicable specifications. B. All piping shall be installed with appropriate provisions for movement and expansion. Provide adequate expansion joints, guides, and anchors. C. All piping shall be installed according to ruling codes. D. All pipe and equipment openings shall be protected with temporary plugs or caps. E. Connections to equipment or control valves shall include unions whether shown on drawings or not. F. Chrome Plated Brass: Use white lead on threaded joints. Do not mar pipe. (Marred chrome pipe, valves, fittings, etc., shall be replaced.) Avoid use of toothed pipe wrench. G. Install piping approximately as indicated, straight, plumb and as direct as possible. H. Do not install within 6 inches of floors, or across doors or windows. Keep all piping concealed in finished rooms unless otherwise indicated. Install exposed risers as close to wall as possible, without offsets unless otherwise noted. Center risers, pipe fine, etc., on adjacent construction. I. Keep all piping as high as possible. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other and space to permit applying insulation and installation of valves. J. Bent nipples are not permitted; make offsets with fittings ream, file and remove all burrs and chips from pipe before installation. K. Use full length of pipe wherever possible. L. Provide drainage piping of sizes noted or directed for equipment requiring drains. Connect to drainage system or spill to floor drain. This shall include all relief valve discharges, control and equipment drains. M. Before starting installation of piping, survey the routes and check for interferences. Modify route as required with the permission of the Owner at no additional cost.
3.03 ADAPTERS A. Steel Pipe to Copper Tube: Provide dielectric union.
Georgia Highway Garage PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 23 2113-3 February 19, 2021 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Letters in the schedule refer to paragraphs of Articles 2.02, 2.03 and 2.04 of this Section. The reference in parenthesis is an option; select one. Use the following materials unless otherwise noted:
2.02 2.03 2.04 Service - Size Location Pipe Fittings Joints <3” Above Slab A A G Domestic Water Piping <3” Below Slab B B - Domestic Water Piping ≤1” All Q N J Sanitary Waste Piping All Below Slab G H F Sanitary Waste Piping All Above Slab D D D Sanitary Vent Piping All All G H F Hot Water Piping All All A A G Radiant Floor Piping All All P O J Compressed Air Piping All All A A G <2-1/2” Indoor F F B Natural Gas Piping ³2-1/2” Indoor F G E Refrigerant Piping All All N M A Condensate Drain Piping All All G H F
END OF SECTION 23 2113
Georgia Highway Garage PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 23 2113-4 February 19, 2021 SECTION 23 2116 PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of piping specialties, including, but not limited to, unions, strainers, gauges, thermometers, manometers and other specialty items. B. Related work specified in other Sections includes: Basic Mechanical Requirements 23 0000 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 0500 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 23 2113 Pipe Hangers and Supports 23 0529 Plumbing 22 0000
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The items in this Section are specified in a general manner and for normal conditions. Where corrosive liquids or gases are involved, or where materials are encountered which require special construction, use materials adequate for the service intended.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0000. B. Product Data: Submit product data on the following items: 1. Unions 2. Dielectric Unions 3. Dielectric Waterway Fittings 4. Y-Type Strainers 5. Pressure Gauges 6. Thermometers 7. Temperature/Pressure Test Plug 8. Circuit Setters 9. Valves 10. Valve tags C. Catalog cuts, technical data, and installation, operation and maintenance instructions for each item to be provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 UNIONS A. Use Required - For pipes with threaded, soldered, solvent cemented, or welded joints, provide unions at piping connections to each piece of equipment, at intervals of not more than 50' in straight runs of pipe, at each valve or cock (except where valves and cocks have union ends), and elsewhere as required to adequately service the piping system and equipment. B. For Steel and Iron Pipe - Malleable-iron, Class 150, brass to brass or brass to iron seats, ground joint. C. For Copper Pipe - Cast bronze, 125 wsp, solder joint, copper to copper unions.
Georgia Highway Garage PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 2116-1 February 19, 2021 2.02 DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Use required - Provide dielectric unions and flanges with gaskets at the following locations: 1. At the connection of dissimilar metal pipes. 2. On steel pipe whenever it leaves the ground. B. Performance Requirements - Capable of separating metals in a manner which will prevent the passage of more than 1% of the galvanic current which would exist with metal to metal contact. C. Construction - Pressure and temperature rating shall be no lower than those of the piping system in which installed and shall be of the same material as the piping. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Eclipse, Inc. 2. Perfection Corp. 3. Watts Regulator Co.
2.03 DIELECTRIC WATERWAY FITTINGS A. Use required - Provide dielectric waterway fittings (wet service) at the following locations: 1. At the connection of dissimilar metal pipes. 2. On steel pipe whenever it leaves the ground. B. Performance Requirements - Capable of separating metals in a manner which will prevent the passage of more than 1% of the galvanic current which would exist with metal to metal contact. C. Construction - Pressure and temperature rating shall be no lower than those of the piping system in which installed and shall be of the same material as the piping. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Epco Sales, Inc. 2. Victaulic
2.04 STRAINERS, “Y” TYPE A. Use Required - Where shown on the Drawings or specified. B. Construction - Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Screens shall be Type 304 stainless steel, with 20 mesh perforations. Provide strainers with 125 psi working pressure rating except 250 psi pressure rating for systems 100 psig or greater. C. Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast iron body for steel piping systems and cast bronze body for copper piping systems, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted valve and pipe plug. D. Flanged Ends, 2½² and Larger: Cast iron body, bolted screen retainer with off center blowdown fitted with valve and pipe plug. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Zurn Industries, Inc. 2. Keckley Company
2.05 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Use Required - Where shown on the Drawings or specified and on the suction and discharge of pumps. For circulator pumps, one pressure gauge is required with isolation valves to monitor both suction and discharge.
Georgia Highway Garage PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 2116-2 February 19, 2021 B. Gauges - Dial type utilizing a phosphor bronze Bourdon bottom, complete with weatherproof black iron case, 4½" dial, ¼" NPT male threads, stainless steel rack and pinion movements with nylon faced segments, black pointers with micrometer zero adjustments and white plastic dials with black figures. C. Scales 1. Pumps - In psig with range about two times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 10% above the shut-off head, unless otherwise specified. D. Standard Gauge Accessories - Provide each gauge with pressure sensing tubing, main pipeline pressure taps, a shut-off cock, and an air bleed. E. Gauge Snubber - Provide a snubber with each gauge which may be subjected to rapid pressure changes so that pointers do not vibrate during operation. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. U.S. Gauge Company 2. Ashcroft
2.06 THERMOMETERS A. Use Required - Where shown on the Drawings or specified and on the entering and leaving side of heat generating equipment. B. Thermometers shall Ashcroft Series EI Bimetal Thermometers or approved equal. Dial shall be 5” diameter. Model shall be EveryAngle to allow thermometer to be rotated 360º and angled 180º. Case and stem shall be made of stainless steel. Glass window shall be heavy duty. C. Provide appropriate temperature well for installation of thermometer. D. Install so that thermometer may be read from floor level.
2.07 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE TEST PLUG A. Furnish and install as indicated on the Drawings, Pete’s Plug. B. Temperature/pressure test plug to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" O.D. Solid brass fitting with valve core of Nordel color coded and marked cap with gasket rated at 1,000 psig. C. Provide test kit to the owner upon completion of testing consisting of the following: 1. (2) pressure gauges 0 - 60 psi, 0.5% accuracy with adapters. 2. (2) bimetal thermometers 0F to 220F, 0.5% accuracy. 3. Compartmentalized protective carrying case. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Petersen Products Company
2.08 CIRCUIT SETTERS A. Bronze calibrated balance valve with provisions for connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Meter connections to have built-in check valves. An integral pointer shall register degree of valve opening. Valve shall have internal seals. Constructed for 125 lb. wp at 250°F. B. All balancing cocks where shown on drawings are required to be of the flow measuring type. If non-flow measuring type are installed, contractor will be required to remove non-flow measuring balancing cocks and install flow measuring type prior to balancing. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Tour and Anderson 2. Circuit Solver
Georgia Highway Garage PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 2116-3 February 19, 2021 2.09 VALVES – GENERAL TYPES A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. Crane Co. b. Hammond Valves c. Kitz Corporation d. Milwaukee Valve Company e. Nibco 2. Description: a. Sizes: up to 2” b. Standard: MSS SP-110 c. SWP Rating: 150 PSIG d. SWP Rating: 600 PSIG e. Body Design: Two Piece f. Body Material: Forged Brass g. Ends: Threaded or socket h. Seats: TFE i. Stem: 316 Stainless Steel j. Ball: 316 Stainless Steel k. Port: Full B. 125 lb. WSP, Crane, as listed below, or Fairbanks, Lunkenheimer, Jenkins, Kennedy, Hammond, Nibco, Stockham or Walworth. 1. Stopcocks: Brass square head screwed. (250) 2. Petcocks: ¼" brass tee screwed. (700) 3. Checks: ¼" - 1" bronze 90° swing disc screwed. (34) 4. Checks: 1¼" - 70, 125 lb. WSP - Miller Fig. 162 or approved equal. Check valves on the discharge pumps shall be flow check style. 5. Drain Valve – Bronze ball valve with dust cover and chain, Apollo 78-100 Series C. Any valves used for domestic cold water, domestic hot water or domestic hot water re-circulation shall be “lead free” and contain no more than 0.25% weighted average lead content.
2.10 VALVE TAGS A. The tag shall be made from a plastic laminate of heavy plastic with a brass eyelet in the corner. Typed information on the plate inside the laminate will show a valve number, the fluid in the pipe, and the direction of flow for the equipment involved. Seton SPT 3 or equal.
2.11 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide any materials not specifically shown or described but required for a complete and proper installation. Select the materials and submit shop drawings to Engineer for acceptance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Carefully install work in accordance with the manufacturers' recommended installation instructions.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND WATERWAY FITTINGS A. Install dielectric unions and fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems.
Georgia Highway Garage PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 2116-4 February 19, 2021 B. Bronze bodied valves and devices installed in steel piping systems do not require dielectric fittings when both connections are made with steel piping. Iron bodied valves and devices installed in copper systems require dielectric fittings. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF “Y” TYPE STRAINERS A. Install horizontal strainers for water systems with wye oriented vertically down.
3.04 VALVE TAGS A. Fasten a tag to each valve with a brass chain. B. Provide a valve chart framed in glass or plastic laminate and hang in boiler room.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION A. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be at least 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. B. All equipment shall be identified by stenciling the title of the equipment in a position that is clearly visible. C. Piping shall be identified at all tees, at equipment locations and in each separate room. D. All color codes of piping shall comply with ANSI A 13.1.
END OF SECTION 23 2116
Georgia Highway Garage PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 2116-5 February 19, 2021 SECTION 23 3000 AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all material and equipment related to air distribution consisting of the following but not limited thereto: Ductwork, duct accessories, louvers, flexible duct connections, and devices as shown on the Drawings or as required to provide a complete and operable system. B. Related work specified elsewhere includes: Basic Mechanical Requirements 23 0000 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 0500 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 23 2113 Pipe Hangers and Supports 23 0529
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide at least one person who shall be present during the execution of this portion of the Work, is familiar with the types of materials being installed and the methods for their installation, and who shall direct the Work performed under this Section. B. Fabricate and install all ductwork in accordance with recommendations and procedures of the latest edition of the ASHRAE Handbooks, all pertinent local, state, and federal codes, and the "Duct Manual of Sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air-Conditioning Systems" published by the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. C. Fan performance and sound power level ratings shall be based on laboratory tests conducted in accordance with the latest edition of the "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Ratings" approved jointly by ASHRAE and AMCA and all fans shall be so labeled. D. All fans for this Project shall be manufactured by a member of AMCA. E. Acceptable manufacturer as noted.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 0000. B. Provide shop drawings, catalog cuts, and technical data on materials, equipment, capacities, and ratings. C. Follow manufacturers recommended installation instructions. D. Provide manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals, trouble shooting guides, and list of recommended spare parts. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store equipment in manufacturer's original, undamaged shipping containers, with tags and labels intact and legible. B. Store up off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCTWORK A. Construct all ductwork of galvanized sheet metal unless noted otherwise. B. All sheet metal used for duct and plenum construction shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified. Galvanized steel shall be of lock forming quality with a zinc coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot on each side. Metal gauge, joints, connections, fan casings, casements,
Georgia Highway Garage AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-1 February 19, 2021 bracing, supports and other details not listed in these specifications or indicated on the drawings shall comply with the SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and shall become part of this specification as though printed herein. C. Fabricate ductwork in a neat and workmanlike manner, free from dents, all joints driven home, smooth inside, neat outside, air tight and without the use of tcpe. Inside radius of elbows not less than 1.5 times width. Provide all square elbows with turning vanes. D. Fabricate branch take-offs with 45° tee connection or straight tee connection with air extractors. E. All low-pressure supply ducts shall be sealed to limit leakage to 5% or less of system air capacity.
2.02 METAL GAUGES, SEAMS, TRANSVERSE JOINTS, AND BRACING A. Provide metal gauges, seams, transverse joints and bracing in accordance with the recommendations of the latest edition of the SMACNA Standard. B. Lap, crease, and secure all joints for airtight connections. Lap all slip-joints in direction of air flow.
2.03 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Install flexible connections between all ducts and heat recovery units, condensing units, etc., to prevent the transfer of equipment vibration to the ductwork. B. Adjoining duct inlet shall be same size and shape of equipment outlet and shall be aligned with outlet and independently supported with a minimum of 2" separation from equipment. C. Provide materials that meet the requirements of NFPA Pamphlet #90A, and are UL approved for use intended, as manufactured by Duro-Dyne Ventfabrics, Inc., Elgin or approved equal.
2.04 ROUND DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Factory manufactured or machine fabricated of galvanized steel or aluminum with lock formed joints and seams where not exposed. Exposed round ductwork shall be spiral. B. Low pressure round ductwork of rigid snap lock or ACME seam pipe, seal joints and seams. 1. Include damper with locking quadrant in collar where a manual damper is shown on plans. 2. Connect to rectangular ductwork with spin collars or clinch collars; seal airtight with suitable duct sealer.
2.05 DUCT HANGERS A. Provide duct hangers as required and specified in the following schedule: 1. Type "A" hangers shall be 1" x 16 gage galvanized steel or aluminum strap as required to correspond with the type of ductwork. Fasten straps to both sides and a minimum of one inch under ducts with sheet metal screws, rivets or bolts. Maximum hanger spacing of 8'- 0". Provide three (3) hangers at each take-off or branch duct. 2. Type "B" hangers shall be 5/16" dia. hanger rods with 1½" x 1½" x 1/8" angle brace. Use nuts and washers to connect rods and angle brace. Maximum hanger spacing shall be 8'- 0". B. Duct Schedule and Hanger Type:
Duct Dimensions (inches) Hanger Type Up thru 12 A 13 thru 18 A 19 thru 30 A/B C. For several ducts on one hanger Type "B" may be used. Select size of hanger by sum of duct widths equal to maximum width of duct schedule.
Georgia Highway Garage AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-2 February 19, 2021 2.06 DUCT SEALANT A. All duct systems shall be effectively sealed. Total allowable leakage from low pressure ducts shall not exceed five (5) per cent of the total system design air flow rate. These requirements are in compliance with ASHRAE Standard 90.1, and SMACNA High, Medium and Low-Pressure Duct Construction Standards (Seal Class A, B, C, D). B. Sealant, for indoor use shall be DP 1020 water based duct sealant or approved equal. 1. Color: Gray Base: 2. Water Chemical Family: Synthetic Latex Solids Content: 70 ± 2% 3. Viscosity: Approx. 300,000 - 400,000 cps Shore A 4. Hardness: Greater than 20 Application 5. Temperature: 40°F - 110°F 6. Stability: 5 cycles no deterioration (DPTM-20) 7. Service Temperature: -25°F - 200°F 8. Flammability: Non-flammable wet or dry 9. Flash Point: No flash to boiling 10. Pressure Classes: Meets all SMACNA pressure classes 11. The sealant must be applied according to manufacturer’s instructions
2.07 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide suitable access doors and frames to permit inspection, operation and maintenance of all valves, controls, dampers, filters, bearings, heating specialties and other apparatus concealed behind the sheet metal work. B. Access doors in the ductwork should be the maximum size that will fit. C. Fire damper access doors should never be less than 16”x16”. D. Fabricate door and frame of minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel, hinged, fastened with a minimum of one (1) camlock or similar latch on doors through size 10 x 12 and two (2) on larger size doors; double panel construction for door in insulated ductwork with 1" thick insulation between panels; gasket doors all around for tight sealing.
2.08 MANUAL DAMPER (VOLUME DAMPER) A. Provide volume dampers as shown on plans or at any branch line (if not shown). B. Dampers shall be two gauges heavier than the duct in which installed. C. Operators shall be operated by locking type quadrant operators.
2.09 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS A. Furnish and install air diffusers, grilles and registers of capacities and material as required to accommodate the required airflows. Velocities shall be a maximum of 400 fpm. B. Manufacturers shall be Price, Titus, Metalaire, or approved equal.
Georgia Highway Garage AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-3 February 19, 2021 2.10 LOUVERS A. Furnish and install louvers with dimensions, material finish, and accessories as indicated in the Performance Specifications. B. Manufacturers shall be Greenheck or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to the installation of the Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that the Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Make field measurements to ensure precise fit of all items and to verify that the work of this Section may be fabricated and installed in accordance with the original design and accepted Shop Drawings.
3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation schedule with the schedule of other trades to ensure orderly and timely progress of the Work. B. Openings for the work of this Section shall be provided at the time of construction of adjacent work so as to eliminate the need for subsequent cutting and patching. C. Verify that all such work is being properly performed and do not commence installations until conditions are satisfactory.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Take all necessary measurements at the building and fabricate the ductwork on the site if required to ensure an approvable installation. B. Provide cross overs, transitions, offsets and changes in duct shapes as required in order to avoid interfering with pipe lines and to maintain full areas of ducts. No pipes shall pass through ducts. C. The right is reserved to vary runs, shapes and make offsets during construction to meet structural interference. Consult with other trades to establish clearances before installing ductwork, grilles, registers and diffusers. D. Install suitable access doors wherever necessary to permit operation, adjustment and servicing of equipment. E. Connect the ducts, casings, and other sheet metal work to all outside air intakes and exhausts through building walls. Blank off unused portions of louvers with proper type and gauge sheet metal faced on room side with one-inch thick rigid insulation with vapor barrier. F. At connections to all equipment, support ductwork independently with no weight upon the equipment. G. Furnish and install hangers, brackets and supports for all sheet metal work. Secure ducts passing through walls and floors to angle frames by rivets or sheet metal screws. Secure angle iron frames in place by inserts, expansion bolts or wood screws. H. Support rigid round ducts at joints and on maximum 5'-0" centers. Support rectangular ducts to 24" wide at joints and on maximum of 6'0" centers. Supports are to prevent sag and vibration when equipment is operating at maximum speed and capacity. I. Protect openings in ductwork during construction. Seal supply and exhaust boots to prevent dirt and materials from entering the system during construction. Clean system thoroughly when complete.
Georgia Highway Garage AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-4 February 19, 2021 J. Install ductwork and accessories to provide a system free from buckling, warping, and vibration.
3.04 INSULATION OF DUCTS A. Insulate ductwork in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 0700. 3.05 DAMPERS A. Provide manual volume dampers in all duct branches and main runs for complete balancing of air distribution systems. B. Provide motor-operated dampers where indicated on the drawings and diagrams, build into ductwork as required. Mount operator and linkage to provide sequence of operation desired. C. Fire dampers shall be installed as required to meet the NFPA Codes. Access panels shall be installed in ductwork to service all fire dampers.
END OF SECTION 23 3000
Georgia Highway Garage AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3000-5 February 19, 2021 SECTION 23 5200
GAS-FIRED CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of packaged, modulating, sealed combustion, power-vented high efficiency natural gas-fired hot water boilers with accessories and capacities as shown on the Drawings or listed here-in.
B. Related work specified elsewhere includes:
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 0000 HVAC Piping Specialties 23 2116 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 23 2113 Pipe Hangers and Supports 23 0529 Mechanical Insulation 23 0700 Electrical Division 26
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide at least one person who shall be present during the execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be familiar with the types of materials being installed and the material manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and who shall direct all work performed under this Section.
B. Employ skilled workers regularly employed in this type of work.
C. Accurately install all pipes, fittings and equipment as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
D. Boilers shall be built in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and net ratings shall be approved by the Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers.
E. Maximum allowable working pressure as listed on the rating label.
F. Acceptable manufacturers shall be HTP Modcon, or an approved equal.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 23 0000.
B. Provide shop drawings containing complete manufacturer's information and instructions pertaining to equipment and its installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle all equipment and its accessories so as to keep clean and free from damage due to water or other deteriorating elements.
Georgia Highway Garage GAS-FIRED CONDENSING 23 52 00-1 February 19, 2021 BOILERS PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BOILERS
A. Furnish and install a completely assembled, modulating, sealed combustion, high efficiency, gas-fired boilers with a stainless steel, fire tube heat exchanger.
B. Installation of the boilers shall be according to manufacturer’s installation instructions and all work shall be completed in a neat and workmanship like manner.
C. The boilers shall operate at a minimum Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency (AFUE) of 96% and shall comply with the energy efficiency requirements of ASHRAE 90.1, latest edition and the minimum efficiency requirements of ASHRAE 103, latest edition.
D. The boilers AFUE efficiency shall be verified through a third party testing agency under guidance of the Hydronics Institue Division of AHRI and listed in the AHRI Certification Directory.
E. The boilers shall be capable of full modulation, with a minimum turn down of 5 to 1.
F. The boilers shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 registered company and shall bear the ASME “H” stamp according to Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1. The stainless steel heat exchanger of the boilers are to behydrostatically pressure tested at the factory in accordance with ASME requirements.
2. The maximum allowable working pressure is 30 psig water as listed on the rating plate.
3. The heat exchanger shall be registered with the National Board and contain a registry number on the rating plate.
G. The boilers shall meet the following regulatory requirements:
1. The boilers shall be ITS/ETL certified and listed to ANSI Z21.13/CSA 4.9 test standards for US and Canada.
2. Boilers shall meet or exceed the SCAQMD (South Coast Air Quality Management District of California) Low NOx emission requirement of 14 NG/J.
3. The boilers shall meet Department of Energy guidelines for Energy Star energy efficiency.
4. The boilers shall meet all Vermont CBES 2015 efficiency requirements.
H. Boiler Construction
1. Stainless steel, fire tube heat exchanger.
2. The grade of stainless must be of 316L providing resistance to corrosion at elevated temperatures.
3. The heat exchanger shall be of welded construction and shall not contain any banding materials, bolts, gaskets, or O-rings in the construction.
Georgia Highway Garage GAS-FIRED CONDENSING 23 52 00-2 February 19, 2021 BOILERS 4. The boiler combustion chamber shall be sealed and located at the top of the heat exchanger which should be of a counterflow design and vertical to assure that sediment and any potential lime that may form will fall to the bottom away from the tube heat.
5. The boiler flues ways shall be of vertical design that allows condensate to “wash down” the flue surface preventing potentialcombustion residue from adhering to the flue ways.
6. The boiler shall be supplied with a gas valve designed with negative pressure regulation.
7. The gas valve on the boilers shall operate with an inlet gas pressure of a minimum 5” w.c. to a maximum of 13” w.c. and shall be independent of the type of gas (natural or propane). If the inlet gas pressure exceeds the maximum allowable 13” w.c. a 100% lock-up type gas pressure regulator, properly sized, must be installed in the gas supply piping and adjust as to prevent an inlet gas pressure in excess of 13” w.c.
8. The burner shall be a premix combustion type system, made with a burner head constructed of stainless material and able to provide a wide range of modulating firing rates.
9. The boilers shall be equipped with a variable speed blower system to precisely control the fuel/air mixture to provide modulating boiler firing rates for maximum efficiency.
10. The boilers shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed and pre-painted on both sides.
11. The individual boiler control shall have an electronic display for boiler set-up, boiler status, and boiler diagnostics.
I. Boiler Controls and Trim
1. All electrical components shall be of the highest quality manufacture and bear a UL of UL recognized label.
2. Supply voltage shall be 120 volt/60 hertz/single phase.
3. The boilers shall be furnished with controls and boiler trim that provides:
a. High limit temperature control of 200°F. b. Operating temperature limit of 60°F to 194°F. c. Pressure gauge dial that is clearly marked and easy to read. d. ASME certified pressure relief valve, set to relieve at a minimum 50 psig. e. Flue gas, outlet water temperature, and return water temperature sensors. f. Low water protection. g. Built-in freeze protection. h. Outdoor sensor to provide Outdoor Reset Control. i. System Sensor. j. NO Domestic hot water priority is required.
J. Venting and Combustion Air
1. The boilers shall be installed and vented with a direct vent vertical system with a horizontal or vertical termination of both the vent and combustion air (see drawings for termination location/type). The vent pipe shall be PP Polypropylene or AL29-4C® Stainless Steel. A separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the boiler from the outside and may be PVC, CPVC, Polypropylene or Stainless Steel sealed pipe.
Georgia Highway Garage GAS-FIRED CONDENSING 23 52 00-3 February 19, 2021 BOILERS PVC or CPVC of Foam Core construction is not an approved material for vent piping or combustion air piping.
K. Accessories
1. MC to provide with the following:
a. System Sensor. b. Condensate Neutralizer Kit for each boiler.
L. Boiler Manuals
1. The boilers shall be provided with complete instruction manuals, including:
a. Boiler Operational and Maintenance Manual b. PVC/CPVC Vent Supplement c. User’s Guide
M. Warranty
1. The boiler heat exchanger shall carry a ten (10) year limited warranty.
2. The parts used in the assembly of the boiler shall carry a one (1) year warranty.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION/PREPARATION/INSTALLATION
A. Furnish other trades with the locations, rough opening dimensions, and other information which may affect their work and will insure proper installation under this Section.
B. Verify that all such work is being properly performed and do not commence installations until conditions are satisfactory.
C. Install boilers in the locations shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's approved installation instructions.
D. Provide boiler clearances per manufacturer’s requirements.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage GAS-FIRED CONDENSING 23 52 00-4 February 19, 2021 BOILERS SECTION 26 05 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section covers the general provisions that are applicable to all electrical work and the testing of the completed electrical systems. The requirements of other Sections shall take precedence over the requirements of this Section.
B. Equipment, pumps, plumbing items, HVAC equipment and other related work is specified in other Sections that are not a part of Division 26. The electrical connections to these devices, and the requirements for motors, motor starters, panelboards and other related work are specified in the appropriate Sections of Division 26. Certain electrical equipment is specified in other Divisions and is required to be furnished by equipment manufacturers. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including general conditions and supplemental conditions of other specification sections, apply to work in this section.
C. Division 26 covers, in broad detail, the extent of the electrical work and the equipment to be provided and shall not be construed as a complete description of all of the details of design and construction required.
D. Drawings
1. Contract Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of the work and indicate in general arrangement of the equipment and do not indicate every required offset, fitting, box, etc. Follow these Drawings in laying out the work. Consult all Drawings to become familiar with all conditions affecting the work and to verify spaces in which the work will be installed. Verify all dimensions with architectural plans.
2. Reasonable changes required by job conditions (including offsetting of conduit and light fixtures, etc.) shall be made at no additional cost to the owner.
3. Locations of equipment are to be as: a. Shown on Drawings; b. Directed in the field; c. Required for proper connection of equipment to be served; d. Required for proper symmetry in the space involved; e. With deviations made only with the specific written approval of Architect and/or owner’s representative.
E. Definitions - The term "provide" shall have the same meaning as "furnish and install". All material so implied either on the Drawings or in these specifications shall be furnished and installed unless specifically noted otherwise.
F. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, appliances and tools and perform all work necessary for the complete execution of the electrical work as shown on the Drawings, required by the Specifications and work not specifically shown or specified, yet required to insure proper and complete operation of all systems and to satisfy the design intent inherent in the Work and to comply with all applicable codes, regulations, and Electric Utility Co. requirements.
Georgia Highway Garage ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260500 - 1 February 19, 2021
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials, equipment, sizes, capacities and installation of electrical work shall conform to the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, the National Electrical Manufacturers Association, the Board of Fire Underwriters, the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, the prevailing State and Local Electrical Codes and to applicable requirements, rules and regulations of the Electric Utility Co. serving the Project.
B. Secure and pay for all permits and inspections required by any of the foregoing authorities. The electrical inspection shall be made and approved by the State of Vermont Department of Public Safety and/or other State and/or local authority having jurisdiction. All certificates shall be in duplicate and shall be delivered to Engineer and become the property of Owner.
C. Before commencing work, review the Project with the local and State inspectors and the Electric Utility Co. Conform, in every respect, with their separate recommendations, unless the recommendations are inferior to, or in direct conflict with, the Contract Documents, then Engineer's acceptance will be required before proceeding with the Work.
D. Nothing in the Specifications, or shown on the Drawings, shall be construed as requiring a violation of any law, code or regulation. Any work or device that fails to receive the approval of any agency shall be promptly changed so as to fully comply.
E. All electrical work shall be performed by a duly licensed electrician who is qualified to do such work and who is normally engaged in this type of work. Because of the complexity of the electrical work, unskilled labor is not permitted.
A. Division 26 shall review the Drawings of other divisions, exchange shop Drawings with them, cooperate in the preparation or prepare space layouts as required, to avoid conflicts and interferences with the installation of other trades in the advanced stages of construction.
B. If, in the interpretation of contract documents, it appears that the Drawings and specifications are not in agreement, the one requiring the greater quantity or superior quality shall prevail, as decided by the Engineer.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit electronic copies of all submittal data and/or complete shop drawings as specified in each section for review.
B. See Division 1, for Administrative Provisions. Submit submittals as specified therein.
C. Submittals shall be complete by specification article. All items specified under the same article as the major item shall be included in the submittals. No partial or incomplete submittal will be accepted or reviewed. Submittals for equipment requiring electrical service shall include wiring diagrams.
D. Submittals and/or shop drawings are to be edited to show specific data for the equipment that the Contractor intends to provide.
E. Submittals and/or shop drawings are to be identified with numbers and letters identical to those listed on the Drawings and/or specifications.
Georgia Highway Garage ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260500 - 2 February 19, 2021
F. Submit electronic copies of installation instructions and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment.
G. Submit electronic copies of all required permits.
H. Submit electronic copies of electrical inspection certificates.
I. Submit complete listing of all tests performed and copies of the certified test results.
J. Submit as-built wiring diagrams and a copy of all circuit directories.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver equipment in crates or cartons and do not uncrate until ready for installation. Protect equipment against weather, damage, and vandalism.
B. Properly store all materials and equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and as required to protect them from damage and corrosion. Check and properly receipt material “furnished by others”, and assume full responsibility for all above materials while in receipt of Contractor and/or in storage with full visible identification and information.
C. Temporarily close all openings to prevent obstruction, damage or the intrusion of foreign materials.
1.2 POWER CHARACTERISTICS
A. Incoming Power – 120/208v, 3-phase, 60Hz., 4-wire
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials and equipment shall be new and shall conform to UL Standards and carry the UL Label in every case where UL Standards have been established for the materials or equipment.
B. To the maximum extent possible, all electrical equipment for any one system shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Engineer reserves the right to disapprove and reject equipment from various manufacturers when acceptable components can be secured from fewer manufacturers and to require that source of materials be unified to the maximum extent possible.
C. Permission to substitute equal or superior items may be requested. Completion date will not be extended because of any time lost due to consideration or installation of substitutions. All coordination of substituted equipment shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates for all items of equipment on all panelboards, controllers, selector switches, starters, safety switches, push button stations, and relay and equipment enclosures.
Georgia Highway Garage ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260500 - 3 February 19, 2021
B. Nameplates shall be black laminated plastic or bakelite, with four edges neatly beveled. Lettering shall be engraved, white, with a height of approximately 3/16" to 1/4".
C. Provide two holes in nameplate and secure to equipment with non-ferrous screws. If adequate space is not available on item to which nameplate is to be affixed, nameplate may be installed adjacent to and as close to the item as possible, and in a position where it is readily visible.
D. Notations on nameplates shall be exactly the same as the corresponding notations that appear on the Drawings.
2.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Provide all structural supports required for proper attachment of all equipment. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to walls with approved anchors.
B. Maintain air space between equipment and supporting walls. Groups or arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel or aluminum channels, angles or bars. Prefabricated steel channels equal to those manufactured by Unistrut or Kindorf are acceptable.
C. Equipment suspended from ceilings shall be supported by adjustable threaded steel rods of adequate strength. No hangers may be secured to furred or suspended ceilings or attached to or carried through ductwork.
D. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports.
1. Use structural supports suitable for equipment.
2. Check electrical loads and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings.
3. Do not cut or weld to building structural members.
4. Unless otherwise noted herein or on Drawings, supports, anchors, anchoring devices and procedures shall conform to the requirements of Division 5.
2.04 MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified, all enclosures, motors, wiring and other materials and all construction methods shall conform to the following:
1. Indoor, Above Ground, Dry Areas - NEMA 1, General Purpose, with gasketing for general purpose applications where atmospheric conditions are normal. Enclosures shall be sheet steel, treated to resist corrosion, prime painted and finished with a gray baked-on enamel. Control stations shall have NEMA 12, oil- tight and dust-tight enclosures.
2. Outdoors, Moist Areas and Indoor Below Grade Areas - NEMA 3R, rain-tight.
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, equipment, accessories, hardware, and appurtenant items, not specifically described but required for a complete and operable electrical installation, shall be new, of respective kinds, and as selected by Contractor subject to the accep- tance of Engineer.
Georgia Highway Garage ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260500 - 4 February 19, 2021
2.06 SPECIAL TOOLS/SPARE PARTS
A. Provide all special tools that are necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the electrical systems.
B. Provide all spare parts that are necessary to insure the proper operation of the electrical systems for the first year of normal operations. Required spare parts are listed in other sections of this division.
C. Furnish two extra sets of fuses for each fuse type and rating incorporated in the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Prior to performing work required under Division 26, carefully inspect all existing conditions and the installed work of all other trades and verify that all conditions and all such work is complete to the point where the electrical work may properly commence.
B. Verify that electrical work may be done in complete accordance with all pertinent laws, codes, regulations and the design.
C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify Engineer.
D. Do not proceed with the work in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
E. Notify proper authorities for inspections of Work required by applicable codes, rules or regulations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Layout all work at the site by consultation with other trades before installing work to eliminate any conflict between this work and work of other trades.
B. Coordinate electrical work, in advance, with other work. The installation of chases, openings, sleeves, etc., required for panels, boxes, outlets, receptacles, conduit, supports, wireways, etc., shall be done at such time as to minimize the need for subsequent cutting and patching. Prior to the ordering of any equipment, verify the location, type and characteristics of service to be furnished.
C. Contractor is cautioned that the power requirements and sizes of various equipment and machinery are subject to change and will be based on the accepted product or substitution actually provided. The actual equipment and machinery installed could result in the need to provide different sized wires, cables, conduits, boxes, starters, overload protection, fuses, and other electrical equipment, controls and materials. As such, the ordering and installation of work is not recommended nor encouraged until all shop drawings and other submissions have been made and have been accepted by Engineer, and all setting and power requirements determined, and then only after Contractor has coordinated all submissions and verified compatibility and determined the sizes required for each individual component. Any such work ordered or installed by Contractor shall be his responsibility and any modifications necessary shall be made to provide electrical systems in complete compliance with the Contract Documents, and to accommodate final installed equipment requirements.
Georgia Highway Garage ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260500 - 5 February 19, 2021
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Perform all work that is both requisite and essential in completing the intended installation in the proper manner.
B. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards, conduits and other work. Field verification of all dimensions is required. Specifications and Drawings are for assistance and guidance, but exact locations, distances and levels shall be governed by actual field conditions. Conduit runs and grounding are shown diagrammatically only, and the layout does not necessarily show the total number of conduits for the circuit required, nor is the location of indicated runs intended to show the actual routing of conduits. Furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition, ready for operation, all conduits, cables and all other materials needed for the complete lighting, power and other electrical systems as shown or indicated on the Drawings. Install additional conduits and required wiring whenever needed to complete the installation of the specific equipment.
C. If any departures from the Drawings are deemed necessary by Contractor in order to furnish an efficient, complete and satisfactory installation, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be brought to the attention of Engineer. Layout all work at the site by consultation with the various trades before installing work to eliminate any conflict between this work and work of other trades.
D. Wherever obstructions are encountered in the path or course of the Work that are not shown nor anticipated in the Contract Documents, do not proceed with the installation of the Work before advising Engineer and receiving detailed information or Drawings or both. Failure to follow this precaution will obligate Contractor to the full extent of all necessary changes and adjustments to conform to the requirements of Engineer.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install all work at the locations shown on the Drawings. Install all work plumb, level and square.
B. Where concealed work is designated, conceal the work within walls, floors, ceilings or underground. Panelboards, switches, receptacles, control stations and other control and wiring devices shall be "flush mounted", complete with cover plates or doors, as applicable. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all other work may be "surface mounted".
3.05 PENETRATIONS
A. Except where absolutely necessary, do not penetrate roofs and waterproofed surfaces. Where required, make penetrations prior to the application of roofing and waterproofing materials and provide all sleeves, pitch-pockets and other acceptable items. Advise Engineer in advance before making such penetrations, even where such penetrations are shown on the Drawings.
B. Seal all work and penetrations that enter or leave a room or structure that may contain a corrosive or potentially lethal atmosphere. Install seals in a manner to stop vapors and gases from escaping or from being communicated from such areas, through conduits and wireways, as well as around conduits or wireways.
C. Thoroughly seal all work and penetrations entering or leaving hazardous areas in accordance with NEC requirements.
Georgia Highway Garage ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260500 - 6 February 19, 2021
D. Sleeves through fire rates walls, shafts, floors and partitions shall be packed full length with UL listed fill to maintain the rating of the separation.
3.06 BALANCING LOADS
A. Circuit numbering on the Drawings is indicated for clarification only. Because substitutions may produce different electrical loads, balance all light, power and heat loads so that a phase-to-phase difference of 5% is not exceeded.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Check for proper phase sequence and test all parts of the electrical systems before placing them in service.
B. Provide all labor, materials, testing equipment, electricity, fuel, lights, lubricants, equipment, instruments and all other materials required for conducting all tests.
C. All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall be free from mechanical and electrical defects, and shall show insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground of not less than that required by NEC, or as specified herein.
D. All systems shall show proper neutral connections.
E. Insulation test of equipment, motors, cables, etc. shall pass the Standard Insulation Test established by the IEEE and shall be made before and after all required high potential tests. All insulation testers shall be of the motor driven, direct reading type, unless otherwise noted.
F. Check nameplate data on each piece of equipment and furnish copy of list to Engineer.
G. Check all motors for proper rotation and speed and all starters for proper overload protective elements. Correct all incorrect conditions.
H. Conduct a ground test on each and every circuit with conductors #2AWG and larger. The test results shall not be less than those required by the NEC or Underwriters Laboratories. Furnish a detailed record of these tests.
I. Test all electrical devices for proper control of motors and equipment.
J. Check amperage in all circuits and compare to nameplate data.
K. Conduct all other tests required to secure approval of the Work from all agencies having jurisdiction.
3.08 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Replace any portion of the Work that does not conform to established standards and requirements.
B. During tests, make all adjustments and changes until the equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily.
C. Should any defects be suspected or found after tests have been completed, make all required adjustments, repairs, and replacements, and retest to the satisfaction of Engineer.
Georgia Highway Garage ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260500 - 7 February 19, 2021
D. Clean all exposed electrical work and remove all unnecessary labels, soil, markings, and foreign material. Do not remove labels required by the Specifications, laws, regulations and codes (e.g. UL Labels) or special labels warning of hazards, denoting special operating and maintenance procedures or labels with other important or meaningful messages, directions or warnings.
E. Thoroughly clean the interior of panelboards and the like and remove all dust, dirt, and other foreign materials which may adversely affect the operation of equipment, damage equipment, or which may create a potential hazard or unsafe condition.
F. Replace or thoroughly dry all electrical appliances or equipment that have been subjected to injury by water. Dielectric test, as directed, all appliances or equipment that is dried.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for proper protective and safety measures when working overhead, under power lines, underground and in finished areas and shall provide all safety equipment and devices and make all repairs, replacements and touch-ups of all work and materials which may become damaged.
B. Where touch-ups do not unnoticeably blend in with adjacent surfaces, as determined by Engineer, replace or completely repaint the entire piece in question.
3.10 INSTRUCTION SERVICES
A. Provide a competent instructor, when requested by Engineer, to instruct Owner and his representatives in the proper operation and maintenance of the electrical systems.
B. Include in the Contract Price, the cost of the instructor on-site time, which may be broken down into several days during the period commencing near the date of final installations and extending through the one-year guarantee period. The instructor's time is totally independent of any time necessarily required of Contractor to return to the Project during the guarantee period for repairs, corrective work or for any other reasons.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260500 - 8 February 19, 2021
SECTION 26 05 19 WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of wires and cables and connections to all equipment, motors, meters, lighting fixtures, motor control centers and electrical signal devices.
B. Related work specified elsewhere includes:
Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Division 31 Other Electrical Work Division 26
C. Definitions: AWG - American Wire Gauge
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturers of wire and cable are Anaconda, General Electric, Senator or an approved equal.
B. Acceptable manufacturers of solderless pressure type terminals and lugs are O.Z. Manufacturing Co., Burndy Manufacturing Co., Thomas & Betts (T & B), or an approved equal.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Cut-sheets of wires, cables and connectors proposed for use.
B. Description indicating where each type of wire and cable will be used.
C. Manufacturers' descriptive literature.
1.04 DELIVERY - HANDLING
A. Deliver all wires and cables in full coils or reels and protect against injury. UL "Approved Tags" giving grade of insulation, size and length of wire in each coil or reel and the manufacturer's name and date of manufacture shall be securely attached to each carton or reel.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRES AND CABLES
A. Conductors shall be hard drawn copper wire having a conductivity of 98% of that of pure copper (Matthiessen's Standard) throughout their lengths.
B. All wire and cable insulation and all outer covering shall be designed for the conditions under which the wire or cable is to be used.
C. Wire for lighting branch circuits shall be no smaller than No. 12 AWG. Wires of greater size, as indicated or required, shall be used to minimize voltage drops. Use no wire smaller than No. 10 AWG in runs exceeding 50' from the lighting panel to the first outlet
Georgia Highway Garage WIRES AND CABLES 260519 - 1 February 19, 2021
or lighting fixture and between fixtures. Conductors of No. 12 AWG may be solid, and conductors of sizes greater than No. 12 AWG shall be stranded.
D. Wire and cable for power circuits shall be insulated for not less than 600 volts with moisture and heat resistant insulation, Type XHHW or THWN.
E. Cable for lighting circuits shall be 600-volt moisture and heat resistant wire, Type THHN or THWN. Where wire is used for direct burial or in conduits that are installed underground, in damp locations and/or exposed to moisture, use Type RHW or XHHW.
F. Cable for 120-volt control circuits shall be No. 14 AWG, multi-conductor flame resistant, jacketed, cable. Each single wire shall consist of 7 strand bare copper, insulated with Type XHHW. Where control circuits are installed in conduits, single conductor cable maybe used in lieu of multi-conductor assembled cable.
G. All conductors for power control, alarm and indication shall be stranded or as specifically shown on the drawings and other specific areas of the Specification.
H. All wiring shall be installed within EMT where exposed in open ceiling areas, mechanical and electrical spaces, and within the shop areas. MC cable may be used above ceiling and concealed within walls.
I. All wiring shall conform to NEC article #511.
2.02 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A. Conductors shall be color coded as follows:
Phase 120/208V A Black B Red C Blue Neutral White or Grey Equipment Ground Wire Green
B. Tag cables and wires in pull boxes, panelboards, motor control centers, at equipment, and at electrical devices. Tags shall be printed, stamped or engraved to indicate the circuit number, the voltage, the phase and a one-word description of its use or an equipment number designation. (e.g. - For Blower B-1, tag would read "B-1, 208V, 3Ø" -- - For lighting, tag would read "LIGHT, CKT 18, 120 V., 1Ø"). Tags shall be wrap-around self-laminating, adhesive backed tags equal to Brady B-191, or phenolic cable marker tags equal to those manufactured by Seton Nameplate Corp.
2.03 SOLDERLESS PRESSURE CONNECTORS
A. No. 10AWG and smaller - T & B "Sta-Kon".
B. No. 8AWG and larger - T & B Series 54100.
2.04 UNDERGROUND MARKERS
A. All underground wires, cables and conduits, which are not encased in concrete, shall have a 6” detectable plastic ribbon marker installed in the backfill, located directly over the line and approximately 9" below finished grade, unless otherwise noted.
Georgia Highway Garage WIRES AND CABLES 260519 - 2 February 19, 2021
B. Markers shall be 6” metallic detectable #85524 as manufactured by Seton, or equivalent.
C. Tape shall be imprinted with appropriate warning words similar to, "CAUTION - BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Do not pull wires and cables until conduits have been installed and cleaned and cleared of obstructions.
B. Check all nameplate data of equipment actually furnished to determine wire sizes required.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. All circuits shall be made up of single conductor wire or cables, unless otherwise noted.
B. Carefully install conductors to prevent damage to insulation and do not apply excessive strain on the wires.
C. If lubrication is necessary, install conductors using powdered soapstone or other UL labeled electrical lubricant. Oils, greases or other compounds are not permitted for use as lubricants.
D. Where enclosure size of terminals at control devices make 7 strand No. 12 AWG wire termination impractical, termination of external circuits may be made in adjacent junction boxes with terminal strips, with No. 14 AWG stranded wires provided between terminal strips at control device and junction box.
E. Provide all wire connectors, terminal lugs and other items required and necessary to complete all wiring.
F. Connection of conductors to terminal posts or other conductors shall insure a thorough and tight connection without damaging the conductor. Make connections by means of solderless pressure type terminals or lugs. Connectors shall be for proper cable size and shall have a conductivity not less than that of the wire or cable to which they are attached. Carefully finish and fit to provide a low resistance connection without reducing cable copper.
G. Installations requiring special tools for proper application shall be installed only with those tools and in accordance with the established practice and the recommendations of the manufacturer.
H. Remove and replace any wire, cable, insulation, connector or other item of work, which has been pinched, scraped, broken, impaired or damaged.
I. All circuits shall have full size neutral conductors. All neutral conductors shall be the same size as the phase conductors. No circuits shall share neutral conductors.
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A. The number of wires indicated on the Drawings for all electrical, control, indication, metering, telephone and signal circuits have been determined for the general schemes based upon the requirements of the particular type and size of equipment shown or
Georgia Highway Garage WIRES AND CABLES 260519 - 3 February 19, 2021
specified. The actual number of wires needed to complete each system shall in no case be fewer than the number indicated and additional wires shall be provided where necessary and required by the actual equipment finally installed.
B. Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, and for short circuits. Correct all malfunctions when detected.
C. After wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage WIRES AND CABLES 260519 - 4 February 19, 2021
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of A/C System, Equipment, Appliance, and Motor, device and lighting grounds.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUND SYSTEMS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (compression lug), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer’s option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products that comply with NEC, UL, and IEEE requirements and with the industry standards for applications indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The electrical system shall be grounded in the main distribution panel.
B. All conduits entering metal enclosures shall have double locknuts or, if enclosure does not have provision for connecting by locknuts, provide a ground busing, wire jumper, and solderless lug to bond enclosure. All conduits leaving the main distribution panel and main switchboard shall be grounded to the ground bus by means of a grounding busing, wire jumper, and solderless lug.
C. A separate ground conductor (green wire) shall be installed in all raceways for feeders, lighting power, and receptacle branch circuits, all cables, and where called for on drawings.
D. All Distribution and branch circuit panels shall have a separate ground bar, “ILSCO” or approved equal.
E. All metallic conduits 1-1/4” or larger shall have grounding bushings.
F. All SO-type cords, or equivalent, shall have a separate ground wire (green) of equal size to circuit conductor.
G. Equipment ground conductor shall be copper with type XHHW insulation, green only, up to and including #4 AWG; larger sizes may be black and identified with green tape.
H. Paint, grease or other contaminants shall be sanded clean before bonding ground conductor.
Geogia Town Garage GROUNDING 260526 - 1 February 19, 2021
I. All exposed metal pipes such as water lines, gas lines, air lines, oil lines, etc. shall be bonded per NEC.
J. All new data closets shall be provided with a ground bar connected with a solid #6 copper bonded to the main grounding electrode. All data racks and data equipment shall be bonded to this grounding bar in each data closet.
END OF SECTION
Geogia Town Garage GROUNDING 260526 - 2 February 19, 2021
SECTION 26 05 33 CONDUITS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of conduits and boxes.
B. Related work specified elsewhere includes:
Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Division 31 Other Electrical Work Division 26
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Set all conduits and boxes plumb and level.
B. All conduits and boxes shall be straight, free from blisters and defects, and shall bear the Underwriters' Label.
C. All conduits, boxes, raceways, etc. installed in finished areas shall be concealed from view.
1.03 PENETRATIONS
A. Waterproofed Surfaces - Except where absolutely necessary, do not penetrate roofs and waterproofed surfaces. Where required, make penetrations prior to the application of roofing and waterproofing materials and furnish all sleeves, pitch pockets and other approved items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT
A. Rigid non-metallic conduit schedule 40 PVC may be used for all exterior wiring, service entrance ductbank, underground branch circuits and in concrete slabs. Except where exposed to physical damage shall be schedule 80. Rigid non-metallic conduit for service entrance shall be concrete encased under roads and driveways.
B. Installation and fittings shall be in accordance with N.E.C. Article 347. Rigid non-metallic conduits shall be as manufactured by Carlon or approved equal.
2.02 THINWALL CONDUITS
A. Thinwall (EMT) conduit shall be used for all exposed branch circuit wiring in mechanical and electrical rooms. Thinwall (EMT) conduit shall be used for all panel feeder work inside buildings.
B. Fittings for thinwall conduits shall be compression type. Installation shall be in accordance with N.E.C. Article 348. Thinwall conduits shall be as manufactured by Republic, Triangle, Allied or approved equal. Steel set screw fittings may be installed where allowed by NEC and a grounding conductor is provided.
Georgia Town Garage CONDUITS AND BOXES 260533 - 1 February 19, 2021
C. All wiring leaving all panelboards and service equipment shall installed in EMT conduit. No surface MC cable is permitted in any space.
2.03 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUITS
A. Make terminal connections to motors and equipment with liquid-tight, flexible conduit of the same size as the conduit run.
B. Maximum length of liquid-tight flexible conduit - 18".
C. Conduit shall be single strip, continuous, flexible, interlocked, durable wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside, and provided with a tough, inert and watertight plastic jacket, conforming to NEC Article 350.
D. Conduits shall be Seal-Tite, type V.A. (American Brass Co.), Flex-Seal, Type XI (Columbia Cable & Electric Corporation), or equal.
2.04 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be malleable or cast iron with threaded hubs and full body design conforming to NSI C80.4.
B. Covers shall be of stamped metal heavy cast metal with composition gaskets (weatherproof type or vaportight type, as applicable).
C. Fittings and covers shall be galvanized or cadmium plated, inside and outside.
D. For liquid-tight flexible conduits, fittings shall have body and gland nut of cast malleable iron, cadmium plated, a one-piece brass grounding bushing which threads to interior of conduit spiral and a molded vinyl sealing ring between gland nut and bushing.
E. Couplings and elbows shall be threaded, same as conduit.
F. Fittings shall be the "Condulet" type.
2.05 SURFACE RACEWAY
A. Except as otherwise noted, all circuit wiring in finished areas shall be concealed or recessed.
B. Provide all surface EMT raceways and all couplings, elbows, boxes, support clips and other appropriate fittings to provide a safe and complete installation.
C. Size to accommodate required number of conductors.
2.06 GENERAL
A. Conduits shall be sized per ANSI C1 (National Electrical Code). Unless otherwise noted, minimum size shall be 3/4".
B. Each length of conduit shall bear the UL label and the manufacturer's name or trademark.
C. Provide No. 12 galvanized pulling wire in each empty conduit and duct, continuous.
Georgia Town Garage CONDUITS AND BOXES 260533 - 2 February 19, 2021
D. Provide all unions, reducers, conduit caps and all other fittings and hardware required to complete all conduit runs.
E. Use lock nuts and proper insulating type bushings, as required.
F. Fasten all metallic conduits and armored cable to each adjacent section and to all boxes, fittings and equipment with firm, clean metallic contact to provide a well and continuous grounded system.
G. Provide conduit expansion fittings, complete with bonding jumpers, at all concrete expansion joints, between concrete structures and where conduits are firmly attached to two independent structures.
2.07 JUNCTION, PULL AND OUTLET BOXES
A. Size and gauge of boxes shall be in accordance with ANSI C1 and as required by the construction.
B. Boxes and covers shall be rated for the area and use. Secure covers to boxes with brass or galvanized machine screws.
C. Provide cut or punched conduit holes. Torch cutting is not permitted.
D. All boxes exposed to the weather, moisture or vapor shall be cast aluminum with threaded hub. Covers shall be gasketed to make boxes vaportight and waterproof.
E. All boxes shall be provided with suitable ground lug.
F. Where more than two switches or other similar wiring devices are indicated at a single location and at the same elevation, they shall be installed in gang boxes with one cover plate.
G. In the shop areas, all surface junction boxes shall be FS style boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Stamped steel boxes with knock-out shall not be used for surface installations.
2.08 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all underground conduits shall be coated with an approved asphaltum paint and encased in sand.
B. Encasements, all around conduit, shall be a minimum of 6" of sand, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTIONS - VERIFICATIONS
A. The Drawings indicate the general locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment, wiring and other electrical devices and the general details for the complete electrical and telephone installations.
B. Conduit locations are diagrammatic only and do not necessarily indicate the exact location or routing.
Georgia Town Garage CONDUITS AND BOXES 260533 - 3 February 19, 2021
C. Prior to locating and installing conduits and boxes, check the Contract Drawings and the Work to be sure that the locations of all conduits and boxes will not interfere with or be covered by doors, casework, heating and process equipment, or the like, and that conduit stubs for motors and equipment will be placed in the proper locations.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT
A. Conform to NEC requirements.
B. Unless otherwise directed by Engineer or shown on the Drawings, all conduits shall be concealed in floors, walls, ceilings or underground.
C. For exposed work, support conduit every eight (8) feet with galvanized malleable iron one-hole straps and "clampbacks." Secure tightly with screws, bolts or other approved means. Size of bolts shall be commensurate with supported weight.
D. For parallel groups of exposed conduits, provide trapeze hangers or other approved method of installation.
E. All exposed conduits shall be neat and symmetrical and run parallel with adjacent walls, partitions and ceilings. Diagonal runs are not permitted.
F. Perforated straphangers are not permitted.
G. "Running thread" type conduit connections are not permitted.
H. In fill or slabs, run conduits as straight and direct as possible. Where required, use long radius bends. In structural slabs less than 4" thick, conduits having "D" over 1" are prohibited, where "D" is the maximum outside diameter or dimension of the conduit. In structural slabs 4" and thicker, "D" shall not exceed 1-½ inches. Where conduits are permitted in the slab, the center-to-center spacing shall not be closer than 3 "D" and in no case, less than 2 inches clear.
I. Conduit runs, through or below equipment foundations, are not permitted.
J. Unless otherwise specified or directed by Engineer, the minimum depth of cover over underground concrete encasements shall be 30", except under roads, parking lots and other traveled areas where it shall be 48".
K. Underground conduit runs shall be pitched for drainage, away from the level of entry to buildings or equipment.
L. In concrete walls below grade provide O. Z. Gedney type "FSK", or approved equal sleeves for all conduits.
M. The use of wooden plugs inserted into concrete or masonry as a base to fasten conduits is not permitted.
N. Avoid bends and offsets where possible. Where necessary, use a conduit-bending machine. No bends greater than 90° are permitted in any one run of conduit. Provide pull boxes where more bends are necessary.
O. Deformed or crushed conduit is not permitted.
P. Cut conduit with powered hacksaw. Cut ends square. Cut threads, clean and ream.
Georgia Town Garage CONDUITS AND BOXES 260533 - 4 February 19, 2021
Q. Maintain six (6) inch minimum separation between all conduits and water lines.
R. All couplings shall be pulled up tight to provide electrical bond. Ends of conduits terminating in a pressed steel box shall be provided with a galvanized locknut and bushing inside and a locknut outside. Fiber or hardwood bushings are not permitted at termination of feeder conduits.
S. Plug and cap all conduit until ready to pull wires and make connections.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BOXES
A. Locate special function outlets where shown on the Drawings.
B. Make dimension between door openings and wall switches uniform throughout the work.
C. Boxes shall be supported independently of all conduits and shall be rigidly secured in place.
D. On concrete, brick or other masonry surfaces, secure surface mounted boxes with machine screws or bolts and expansive type shield.
E. On building steel, secure boxes by means of clamp type supports and provide rigid vibration-proof installation.
D. Surface mounted pull and junction boxes, one-foot square or more in area, shall be installed to provide a minimum air space between box and mounted surface of one (1) inch.
E. All conduit and box installations shall conform to NEC article #511.
3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust all work to provide a rigid, neat, and clean conduit system.
B. Clear conduits of all obstructions and dirt prior to pulling wires or cables. Use ball mandrel, with a diameter equal to approximately 85% of the inside diameter of the conduit, followed by a close fitting wire brush and wad of felt or similar material. This assembly may be pulled together with, but ahead of, the cable being installed.
C. Clean empty conduits, as specified above.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Town Garage CONDUITS AND BOXES 260533 - 5 February 19, 2021
Georgia Town Garage CONDUITS AND BOXES 260533 - 6 February 19, 2021
SECTION 26 24 13 ELECTRICAL SERVICE, PANELBOARDS, & CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of the incoming electrical service, switchboards, metering, lighting, and distribution panelboards, including circuit breakers and metering equipment.
B. All equipment as shown on the drawings.
1.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D, GE, Cutler Hammer, Siemens or approved equal.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's catalog cuts and layout drawings, clearly indicating all cabinet sizes, breaker sizes, metering equipment, contactors, bus work and other features, sizes and ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELBOARDS AND SWITCHBOARDS
A. Electric panels shall be panelboard construction. Panels shall be Square D, NQ or equal.
B. Panelboard and cabinet shall conform to the requirements of the Underwriters' Laboratories and shall bear the UL label.
C. Panelboards shall be surface-mount. Panelboard shall have front hinged to box with standard door over interior. Hinged front exposes wiring gutter.
D. Panelboard shall be AC circuit breaker type with adequately sized solid neutral and lugs or circuit breaker in the main. Subject to Engineer's approval, circuit schedules may be revised to obtain a more convenient grouping or a better balance of the actual connected load. Provide a separate equipment ground bus in all panels.
E. Mark all circuits, as to their utilization, on a typewritten schedule, in a clear plastic covered window frame inside the door.
F. Panelboards installed indoors, above grade shall have NEMA 1.
G. Panelboards shall have separate ground bar and neutral bar as required by the National Electric Code (Latest Edition).
2.02 MAIN AND FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Breakers shall be mechanically and electrically similar to molded circuit breakers and shall have an interrupting rating of 22,000 AIC or higher as required with bolt-on attachment.
Georgia Town Garage ELECTRICAL SERVICE, PANELBOARDS, & 262413 - 1 February 19, 2021 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
B. Breakers shall be “integrated equipment short circuit rated” to allow 10,000 AIC branch circuit breakers in lighting and branch circuit panelboards.
2.03 LIGHTING AND BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Breakers shall be mechanically and electrically similar to molded circuit breakers and shall have an interrupting rating of 22,000 amperes, or higher if noted, with bolt-on attachment.
B. Breakers shall be Square D, QOB, or equal.
C. Where double pole breakers are required, two single pole breakers with operating handles joined by a locking bar are not permitted.
2.04 PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Breakers shall be mechanically and electrically similar to molded circuit breakers and shall have an interrupting rating of 22,000 AIC with bolt-on attachment.
B. 240/120-volt lighting and branch circuit breakers shall be Square D, QOB, or equal.
C. Notations on nameplates shall be as directed by the Owner.
D. Where double pole breakers are required, two single pole breakers with operating handles joined by a locking bar are not permitted.
2.05 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates for each panelboard.
B. Nameplates shall be black laminated plastic or bakelite, with four edges neatly beveled. Lettering shall be engraved, white, with a height of approximately 3/16" to 1/4".
C. Provide two holes in nameplate and secure to equipment with non-ferrous screws and in a position where it is readily visible.
D. Notations on nameplates shall be the same as the corresponding notations that appear on the equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide and install all feeders, breakers, panels, disconnects, breakers, and all required support structure and required auxiliary equipment.
B. Install panelboard at the locations directed by the Owner. Install panelboards with uppermost breaker at 6'-0".
C. Install, in panelboards, all breakers and other required equipment and appurtenances as directed in these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Town Garage ELECTRICAL SERVICE, PANELBOARDS, & 262413 - 2 February 19, 2021 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 27 26 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section covers the requirements for switches, receptacles, and plates.
B. Related work, specified in other Sections of Division 26, includes conduits, boxes, wires, cables, motor starters, disconnect switches, circuit breakers and similar devices.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All wiring devices and plates shall conform to the requirements of NEC and shall be specification grade and UL listed.
1.03 SUBMISSIONS
A. See Section 26 05 00.
B. Catalog cuts of all switches, receptacles, and plates, clearly indicating ratings and materials.
1.04 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Lighting circuit switches shall be mounted at 42” AFF to the bottom of the switchbox, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
B. General receptacles shall be mounted at 18” AFF to the bottom of the outlet box, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
C. Receptacles in garage and repair areas, maintenance, and storage areas shall be mounted at 48” AFF to the bottom of the outlet box, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SWITCHES
A. GENERAL
1. Flush switches shall be heavy-duty toggle type "AC" rated unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified. Switch mechanisms shall be completely enclosed. Terminal screws or connectors shall be designed to accommodate and firmly ter- minate up to No. 10 solid conductors. All switches shall be white.
2. Where two or more switches or other similar wiring devices are indicated at a single location and at the same elevation, they shall be installed in gang boxes with one cover plate, in an order appropriate to the location of the devices being controlled.
B. Lighting (Indoor - Dry Areas)
1. Specification Grade rated 20 amp; Leviton CS120-2 Series, Hubbell 1120 Series or approved equal.
Georgia Town Garage SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 262726 - 1 February 19, 2021
a. All switches shall be side-wired, “back-wiring” is not acceptable.
2.02 RECEPTACLES
A. General
1. Receptacles, unless indicated as special purpose or otherwise noted, shall be flush side wired and designed to accommodate and firmly terminate up to No. 10 solid conductors. All receptacles shall be white.
2. Special purpose receptacles shall be specification grade of NEMA Number and rating as noted on plans.
B. Duplex (Indoor - Dry Areas)
1. Duplex "T" slot, "U" ground slot, NEMA 5-20R, 20 amp, 125 volts, 3 wire grounding, Specification Grade, Leviton CR20-W or approved equal.
C. Ground Fault Interrupter
1. Ground Fault Interrupter duplex receptacles Leviton 6898-W or approved equal.
2. No receptacles shall feed through the load side of a GFI protected receptacle. Each receptacle indicated on the drawings as GFI protected shall be rated for 20- amps.
3. Outdoor - Wet Areas Shall be Weather Resistant.
2.03 PLATES
A. General
1. Provide plates on all boxes. Boxes recessed in walls shall have plates with the required number of gangs and designed for the material involved.
2. All plates shall be stainless steel with a satin finish.
B. Outdoor - Wet Areas
1. All switches and receptacles shall have PVC, weatherproof switch plates and box covers.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Town Garage SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 262726 - 2 February 19, 2021
SECTION 26 28 00 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this Section includes the furnishing and installation of Equipment, Appliance, and Motor Disconnect Switches and Safety Switches.
1.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Westinghouse, Square D, General Electric, or approved equal.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's catalog cuts and layout drawings, clearly indicating all voltage and ampere ratings, sizes, contactors, buswork and other features including indicator lights, lock-out devices, and other ancillary equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed fusible safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 250 volts, 60 Hz; incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; so constructed that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Each switch shall be equipped with an operating handle which is an integral part of the enclosure base and whose position is easily recognizable, and is pad-lockable in OFF position. Provide NEMA 3R for all locations, or as specified on Drawings.
B. Fusible switches shall have all of the above features. Fusible switches shall have positive pressure-type reinforced fuse clips and a short-circuit rating of 200,000 RMS amperes with class R rejection feature installed in the fuseholders.
C. All switches shall have neutral kits installed where required.
D. Safety switches that are fed from VFD controllers shall come with auxiliary contacts that are used to disable the VFD controllers and VFD controls if the switch is used to de- energize the motor downstream of the VFD.
2.02 FUSES
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time/current and peak let-through current characteristics indicated on Drawings, which comply with manufacturer’s instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Provide UL Class RK5 time-delay fuses rated 250 V, 60 Hz, 1 to 600 amperes, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting motors and circuit breakers. Use Class J fuses where needed for series-protection of circuit beakers.
Georgia Town Garage CIRCUIT AND MOTOR 262800 - 1 February 19, 2021 DISCONNECTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnects and safety switches at the locations shown on the Drawings, complying with manufacturer’s instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, motors, and controllers within sight of equipment served unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Town Garage CIRCUIT AND MOTOR 262800 - 2 February 19, 2021 DISCONNECTS
SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all interior lighting, as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
C. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
D. See Section 26 05 00 for general electrical requirements.
E. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings.
1. Names of manufacturers, cuts, and photometric performance curves of all lighting fixtures to be used on project.
2. Identify fixtures by Fixture Schedule number, including special notations for finishes, colors, and mountings.
3. Names of manufacturers, specification sheets, color, and color rendering index of all lamps to be used on the Project.
4. Operating and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES – GENERAL
Acceptable manufacturers:
A. LED Lighting fixtures: As indicated on Fixture Schedule. “Equal” fixtures that are substitutes from the specified fixtures shall be equal or better in all of the following characteristics:
1. Color 2. Shape 3. Wattage 4. Lumens/watt 5. Listings (DLC, Energy Star, UL) 6. Manufacture quality 7. Material quality and price 8. Lamping 9. Mounting 10. Function 11. Accessories
Georgia Town Garage LIGHTING 265000 - 1 February 19, 2021
B. Lenses: As indicated on Fixture Schedule.
C. All lighting fixtures and electrical components: UL labeled, complete with lamps.
D. Provide all recessed fixtures with gaskets of rubber, fiberglass, or equivalent material to prevent light leaks around flush trim.
E. Provide standard plaster frame for all recessed lighting fixtures installed in plaster walls or ceilings.
F. Design, finish and fabricate material to preclude possibility of rust stain in plaster.
2.02 LED FIXTURES
A. As specified on the drawings.
B. All LED fixtures shall be DLC listed or Energy Star Listed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten lighting fixtures supported by suspended ceiling systems to building structure. Fasten fixtures to ceiling framing system with clips.
B. Coordinate with acoustical ceiling installer so that all lay-in and recessed type fixtures are located in accord with reflected ceiling plans.
C. Locate in exact center of tile when indicated. Remove and replace misplaced fixtures.
D. Install fixtures at the heights shown on the Drawings. Where specific heights are not shown, mount fixtures at a height to provide the most uniform illumination possible at a plane 3' above the finished floor line, except that in no case shall the bottom of the glassware or metal reflector be less then 8' above the floor line, unless the ceiling height will not permit the above mounting heights.
3.02 PROTECTION/CLEANING
A. Cover all fixtures to protect against dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury.
B. All work that becomes physically damaged shall be repaired or replaced when Engineer determines that repairs will not maintain the aesthetic appearance or will adversely affect performance.
C. Replace all broken, scratched or cracked glassware, lenses, reflectors, and lamps.
D. Clean all fixtures of dirt and foreign materials and wash all glassware, lamps, reflectors, and lenses.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Town Garage LIGHTING 265000 - 2 February 19, 2021
SECTION 27 51 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND DATA SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section covers the requirements for telecommunications and data wiring within the Project, as shown on the Drawings.
B. Electrical contractor will provide the following for the installation of the telephone and data system:
1. A 4” square electrical box with appropriate mud-ring and a 1” EMT conduit from each location shown on the Drawings to above the suspended ceiling or finished sheetrock to J-Hook system. All conduits shall terminate with a bushing.
2. All conduit runs and pathways as shown on the drawings or as required for the installation.
3. J-hook system as needed and the complete cat. 6 data and phone cabling system.
4. Category 6 cables as designated on the drawings to the telecommunications termination area. Each jack shall have (2) Cat. 6 RJ-45 Jacks with cables as noted homerun to the tel/data termination area.
5. New, 48-port patch panels as required to support all tel/data jack with 10% spare capacity. These shall be mounted in a new wall mounted rack provided by the contractor. Patch panels shall be Cat. 6, labelled, with double-sided vertical and horizontal wire management, fully terminated and tested at the areas designated as the tel/data termination area.
6. All required ports, jacks, testing, terminations.
7. Grounding bar at the tel/data termination area.
C. Drawings
1. Contract drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of the work and indicate in general arrangement of the equipment and do not indicate every required offset, fitting, box, etc. Follow these drawings in laying out the work. Consult all Drawings to become familiar with all conditions affecting the work and to verify spaces in which the work will be installed. Verify all dimensions with architectural plans.
D. Definitions - The term "provide" shall have the same meaning as "furnish and install.” All material so implied either on the drawings or in these specifications shall be furnished and installed unless specifically noted otherwise.
E. Telecommunications/Data System installation shall comply with EIA/TIA - 568, EIA/TIA – 569, EIA/TIA – 606, NEC Art. 800, and all local and state codes.
F. Insure proper and complete operation of telecommunications and data systems to satisfy the design intent inherent in the Work and to comply with all applicable codes, regulations, and requi- rements.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Georgia Town Garage TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND 271500 - 1 February 19, 2021 DATA SYSTEM
A. All materials, equipment, sizes, capacities and installation of telecommunication work shall conform to the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code, the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, and the prevailing State and Local Electrical Codes.
B. Nothing in the Specifications, or shown on the Drawings, shall be construed as requiring a violation of any law, code or regulation. Any work or device, which fails to receive the approval of any agency, shall be promptly changed to fully comply.
C. All telecommunications/data work shall be performed by those who are qualified to do such work and who are normally engaged in this type of work. Because of the complexity of the telecommunications work, unskilled labor is not permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS
A. TELECOMMUNICATIONS/DATA CABLE – All Equipment shall be cat. 6.
B. Cable system shall consist of two twisted, 4-pair, cat. 6 cable for each telephone/data location. Quantity of cables per jack as indicated on drawings. All cable shall be plenum-rated where required.
C. All telecommunications and data equipment shall be manufactured by Krone, Leviton, or equal.
D. Cat. 6 cable shall be color-coded blue and white.
E. All conduits shall terminate with a fitting and threaded plastic bushing.
F. All wire runs will be labeled at each end of the run with wire runs with panduit wrap around labels.
2.02 PATCH PANELS
A. Patch panels shall be Leviton, cat 6, 48-port as shown on drawings or equal.
B. Provide patch panels for all cable terminations with room for 10% future growth.
2.03 Wall Mounted Data Rack
A. Provide and install a wall-mounted swingable data rack.
1. EIA compliant 19” wall-mount swing gate rack shall be Middle Atlantic Products model number SFR-12-18 or equal.
2. Overall height shall be 28”, useable rack height shall be 21”, maximum depth shall be no less than 18”, useable depth shall be no less than 16”.
3. Weight capacity shall be 100 lbs.
4. Rack shall be constructed of the following materials: backpan shall be 14-gauge steel with durable black powder coat finish, rackrail shall be 11-gauge steel rackrail with tapped 10-32 mounting holes in universal EIA spacing with black e-coat finish and marked rackspaces.
Georgia Town Garage TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND 271500 - 2 February 19, 2021 DATA SYSTEM
2.04 CABLE SUPPORT
A. Data and communication wiring shall be run separate from all other electrical wiring.
B. A complete J-hook system shall be installed in the hallways to the tel/data termination area.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all outlet boxes, plates, labeling, and accessory equipment for complete operable system.
B. Provide sleeves for all penetrations of rated walls and floors. Sleeves through fire rated walls, shafts, floor and partitions shall be packed full length with UL listed fill to maintain the rating of the separation. Comply with NFPA requirements.
C. All conduits shall have a pull string for future use.
D. All conduit terminations shall have an anti-shorting device and connector fitting.
E. All cable and jacks shall be labeled.
3.02 TESTING
A. All cables and jacks shall be tested and certified by a qualified technician at a speed of 1000mbits/second. All cables not passing this test shall be replaced.
B. All data drops need to pass a fluke test to include:
i. Wire Map ii. Resistance iii. Length iv. Propagation Delay v. Delay Skew vi. Impedance
3.03 WARRANTY
A. Provide standard 15-year warranty on all data system components or equal.
B. Warranty: Basic Product Warranty with 15-Year Performance Warranty and 15-Year Applications Assurance.
C. Coverage: Product only for 1 year from the time of purchase. Performance and Applications Assurance for 15 years excluding labor costs.
3.04 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The contractor shall provide a set of As-built drawings showing all jacks, all labeling, terminations and junction boxes.
Georgia Town Garage TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND 271500 - 3 February 19, 2021 DATA SYSTEM
B. The following deliverables are to be provided along with the Ethernet communication data drop network test results. Data drop location and naming on building drawing format (AutoCAD). Provide soft copies of manuals on CD or DVD in either Adobe PDF format or Microsoft Word format.
C. One hard copy and one soft copy each of network drop lay out by floor with the naming or number convention of each data drop on the drawing.
END OF SECTION
Georgia Town Garage TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND 271500 - 4 February 19, 2021 DATA SYSTEM
SECTION 28 3000 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a new addressable fire alarm system devices as required including all required control panels, power modules, auxiliary notification panels, initiating devices, alarms and all other necessary equipment to allow installation of: 1. New pull stations. 2. New audio/visual alarms. 3. All detectors as shown on drawings. 4. Fire Alarm Control Panel. 5. NAC Panels. 6. Detectors as required by codes. 7. Magnetic door holders if required. 8. Auxiliary system monitoring as required.
B. Actuation of any manual fire alarm station, fire sprinkler alarm switch, automatic detector, or similar devices will activate all indicating appliances within the building. Display at all annunciators, and activate all equipment (as described later in this section) used for emergency forces notification.
C. The fire alarm work shall include all wiring, conduit, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, annunciator panels, fire alarm stations, and all other accessories and miscellaneous items required.
D. The stations, buzzers, annunciators and other major parts shall comply with the applicable NFPA standards and shall constitute a unified system for the satisfactory operation of which one manufacturer shall be responsible.
E. Provide and install duct mounted smoke detectors with remote test station and alarm indication at each mechanical unit of 2,000 CFM or larger. Provide and install remote test switches for all duct detectors.
F. Provide connection the access control system to allow the door strikes to open upon a fire alarm.
G. The fire protection system shall be in conformance with the requirements of the following regulatory agencies whenever the requirements of such agencies are applicable. 1. Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI) 2. Insurance Services Office (ISO) 3. Factory Mutual Engineering Division (FM) 4. Local Building Department 5. Local Town of Georgia Fire Department 6. Local Water Department 7. State of Vermont Department of Public Safety.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283000 - 1 February 19, 2021
H. All materials and equipment used in the installation of the fire protection system shall be as approved in the Underwriters' Laboratories list of inspected fire protection equipment and materials, or the Factory Mutual Laboratories list of approved equipment and fire protection devises involving fire hazard, and shall be the latest product of the manufacturer.
I. The control panel shall include but not be limited to all control equipment, power supply, initiating devices, audible and visual indicating appliances as appropriate, conduit, wiring, fittings, and all other accessories necessary to provide a complete and operable system in accordance with all aforementioned codes.
J. The Contractor shall provide a Fire Alarm Manufacturer’s representative or Field Engineer on site a minimum of twice during the fire alarm installation and testing process. This is for the purpose of sharing information during coordination meetings and to attain device address updates during the installation to minimize downtime.
1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. General Requirements, Division 1.
B. All Electrical Sections in Division 26.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 260500.
B. Submit complete shop drawings, wiring diagrams, catalog cuts, installation instructions and drawings, battery calculations, and descriptive literature. Sufficient information shall be supplied so that the exact function of each installed device is known. NOTE: DOCUMENTATION Submittal of shop drawings shall contain at least one (1) booklet of original manufacturer specification and installation instruction sheets. Subsequent booklets may be copies. All equipment and devices on the shop drawings to be furnished under this contract shall be clearly marked in the specification sheets.
C. Submit electronic copies of complete operating and maintenance manuals of the devices, assemblies, and the complete system. These manuals shall include complete one-line diagrams showing all stations, detectors, etc.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide at least one person who shall be present during the execution of this portion of the Work, is thoroughly familiar with the types of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation, and who shall direct the work performed under this Section.
B. Acceptable manufacturers of the Fire Alarm System shall be Mircom or approved equal.
C. The complete system shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 760 and NFPA 72. All equipment shall be UL listed and meet all State and local codes.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283000 - 2 February 19, 2021
D. Supplier’s qualifications shall indicate years in business, service policies, warranty definitions, and a list of similar installations. Contractor qualifications shall be supplied indicating years in business and prior experience with installations that include the type of equipment that is to be supplied. All pertinent information shall be supplied regarding the reliability and operation of the equipment to be supplied. Delivery dates of the equipment to be supplied shall be furnished.
E. Installation and final test/acceptance dates of the equipment shall be supplied.
1.05 OPERATION
A. The system alarm operation after the alarm activation of any manual station, automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch shall cause all audible indicating appliances to sound in a continuous temporal pattern throughout the building until extinguished by the alarm silence switch or the system is reset.
B. All visual alarm indicating appliances shall display a synchronized pattern throughout the building until extinguished by the alarm silence switch or the system is reset.
C. The system shall be of multiprocessor design to allow each I/O functional module to hold and execute its own program under the control of the main system microprocessor. A common RS- 485 communications network shall tie all I/O functional modules in an integrated network affording true "distributed processing" of all system operations. Each network-interconnected module shall have its own processor and memory.
D. The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an Alarm Verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one minute, the system shall resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification shall operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation shall be selectable by device.
E. The system dialer will be used to monitor the alarm and trouble from the FACP and report to a monitoring service of the owner’s choosing.
1.06 POWER REQUIREMENTS
A. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24VDC and shall be individually fused at the control panels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAT DETECTORS
A. Rate Anticipation: All heat detectors noted “RA” shall be a rate anticipation analog thermal sensor. Heat detectors shall be Thermaltech Analog/Sensor Model #302-194.
2.02 MANUAL FIRE ALARM PULL STATIONS
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283000 - 3 February 19, 2021
A. All manual fire alarm pull stations, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, shall be Double action, high impact, red aluminum body with epoxy finish with raised white lettering and a smooth high gloss finish. The station shall have a hinged front with key lock. Stations that use screwdrivers, allen wrenches, or other commonly available tools shall not be accepted. Stations shall be keyed alike with the fire alarm control panel. When the station is operated, the handle shall lock in a protruding manner to facilitate quick visual identification of the activated station. Mircom or equal.
2.03 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Listed to U.L. Standard 268 and documented compatible with the control equipment. Detectors shall be listed for this purpose by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The detectors shall obtain their operating power from the fire alarm panel supervised detection loop. Removal of the detector head shall indicate a “missing” device condition and describe the device and location of the device for all analog-addressable initiation devices and cause a trouble signal to be generated at the control panel. Detectors shall be photoelectric. Unless otherwise noted, all smoke detectors shall be analog photoelectronic. Smoke sensor shall constantly monitor any change in sensitivity due to the environment. Advance indication shall be given at the control panel as to the need for maintenance and where maintenance is needed. Smoke detectors shall be Mircom or equal.
B. Each detector shall have a flashing status indicating LED for visual supervision. When the detector is actuated, the flashing LED will latch on steady and at full brilliance. The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch.
C. To minimize nuisance alarms, voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be employed as well as a smoke verification circuit and insect screen. The detector design shall provide full solid-state construction and compatibility with other initiating devices (heat detectors, pull stations, etc.). The detector head shall be easily disassembled to facilitate cleaning.
D. Smoke detected noted “DUCT” shall be photoelectric duct-mounted analog-addressable smoke detectors for air handling units. Their housings shall be complete with sampling tube and remote test switch and shall have auxiliary relays.
2.04 SYSTEM TYPE CO DETECTORS
A. System sensor CO1224T or equal system type.
B. Provide monitoring modules and power supplies as required for each unit.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283000 - 4 February 19, 2021
C. Carbon monoxide (CO) detector shall be a system-connected System Sensor model number CO1224T or CO1224TR listed to Underwriters Laboratories UL 2075 for Gas and Vapor Detectors and Sensors. The detector shall be equipped with a sounder and a trouble relay. The detector’s base shall be able to mount to a single-gang electrical box or direct (surface) mount to the wall or ceiling. Wiring connections shall be made by means of EMS screws. The detector shall provide dual-color LED indication that blinks to indicate normal standby, alarm, or end-of- life. When the sensor supervision is in a trouble condition, the detector shall send a trouble signal to the panel. When the detector gives a trouble or end-of-life signal, the detector shall be replaced. The detector shall provide a means to test CO gas entry into the CO sensing cell. The detector shall provide this with a test mode that accepts CO gas from a test agent and alarms immediately upon sensing CO entry. The detector shall perform in the detection of CO up to 12,000 feet above sea level and alarm within the time specified by ANSI/UL 2034 for CO concentrations of 70, 150 and 400 parts per million (ppm), as verified by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory.
2.05 AUDIO/VISUAL ALARMS (Indicating Appliances)
A. HORN / STROBES: Provide a common enclosure for the fire alarm audible and visual alarm devices. The unit shall be complete with a tamper resistant, Pyramidal shaped lexan lens with "Fire" lettering visible from a 180-degree field of view. Integral Xenon strobe shall provide the candela rating as shown on the floor plans with a minimum 15 Candela peak candlepower to meet ADA requirements. All appliances shall be properly supervised. Unit shall be complete with all mounting hardware including backbox (if required). Audio/visual unit shall be UL listed for its intended purpose. Horn/Strobe Wheelock Series or equal. The candela peak candlepower for each device is indicated on the drawings. Color: Red.
B. STROBE UNITS: The unit shall be complete with a tamper resistant, Pyramidal shaped lexan lens with "Fire" lettering visible from a 180-degree field of view. Integral Xenon strobe shall provide peak candlepower to meet ADA requirements. Xenon strobe shall provide 4-wire connection to insure properly supervised in/out system connection. Unit shall be complete with all mounting hardware including backbox. Visual unit shall be UL listed for its intended purpose. Wheelock Series or equal. Color: Red.
2.06 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT PANEL
A. Six-amp power supplies shall be installed as required providing notification appliance power. Module shall supply four 1.5 amp class A power limited notification outputs. Mircom or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING
A. Conduit, wiring, boxes, cabinets, etc. shall conform to the requirements for branch circuit wiring and shall be installed in accordance with NEC, NFPA, and manufacturer's approved shop drawings. Minimum size conduit 1/2 inch. Minimum wire size NO. 14 for signal circuits, No. 12 for power supply, and unshielded twisted pair No. 16 for addressable data circuits. Wiring to be color-coded.
B. The entire system shall be wired class “A”, so that any break in any signal or detection loop will not affect “downstream” devices.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283000 - 5 February 19, 2021
C. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation.
D. The electrical contractor shall coordinate the installation of the fire alarm equipment with the manufacturer or his authorized distributor.
E. It shall be the electrical contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with the supplier, regarding the correct wiring procedures before installing any conduits or conductors.
3.02 TERMINAL STRIPS
A. Provide terminal strips in accessible locked terminal cabinets for connections to external wiring between control panel and stations, alarm signals, and annunciators. Provide approved pressure type terminal blocks or spade lugs on conductors.
3.03 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS
A. Mount 42” above the floor level.
3.04 VISUAL INDICATING AND COMBINATION (AUDIBLE/VISUAL) APPLIANCES
A. Mount the bottom of the visual portion of the appliance 80”-96” above the floor level except in handicapped sleeping areas where the specific NFPA 72 - 2016 code shall be followed.
3.05 SPRINKLER FLOW AND TAMPER SWITCHES
A. All fire protection tamper and flow switches shall be wired by the Electrical Contractor. Switches shall be provided by the Fire Protection Contractor. Coordinate all locations with the Fire Protection Contractor prior to conduit runs and rough wiring. Locations shown on drawings are diagrammatic only and actual locations will vary depending on field conditions.
3.06 PROGRAMMING AND TESTS
A. The entire fire alarm system shall be programmed, tested and adjusted under the supervision of a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer. At the completion of the installation, the system shall be tested to show that the complete system is free from grounded or open circuits; the central control equipment will indicate when a ground or open circuit occurs; and that the alarm initiating devices and supervisory devices are operating normally. Any defects shall be corrected at once and the test reconducted.
B. This project will be constructed in phases. The contractor shall provide adequate testing and programming time to accommodate the multiple times that the entire system will need to be programmed and tested over the entire construction period.
C. When testing has been completed to satisfaction of both Contractor’s job foreman and representatives of manufacturer and Owner, a notarized letter co-signed by each attesting to satisfactory completion of said testing shall be forwarded to Owner and fire department.
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283000 - 6 February 19, 2021
D. Leave fire alarm system in proper working order and, without additional expense to Owner, replace defective materials and equipment provided within 1 year (365 days) from date of final acceptance by the owner.
E. Label all devices with the address and the circuit number and NAC panel location.
3.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Contractor shall supply the following spare parts and components. These parts shall be left with the maintenance department. 1. (1) smoke detectors and bases 2. (2) horn-strobe units 3. (1) strobe only unit
END OF SECTION
Georgia Highway Garage FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283000 - 7 February 19, 2021